Category: Adult/Youth

La Isla de Aquinas – Chapter 19

Chapter 19 – A Lil’ Bit of trouble

I don’t know exactly what woke me up. It’s probably my army training, but the minute I hear the gunshots in the distance, I’m completely awake. I look around and notice the three naked preteen bodies around me. My brain quickly springs into action. I get up and start shaking all three kids. As I’m doing this, I hear footsteps at the front door. Moments later, someone bangs on the door and shouts, “Abrir la Puerta!”

“Wake up!” I whisper loudly as I shake their shoulders.

Audrey is the first to wake, immediately followed by Evan. Owen doesn’t move yet, so I give him another shake.

“Wha… whazzup?” Audrey mumbles, still sleep drunk.

“Boys, get to your room and get dressed! Now!” I say sternly and start pulling up my boxers.

They must notice the urgency in my voice, and after another few bangs on the door, they realize it’s serious. Evan and Owen immediately get up and quickly head over to their room. Audrey gets up too and starts searching for some clothes while I pull a t-shirt over my head and walk toward the door.

“Abrir!!” The voice on the other side of the door shouts more urgent now.

I look over at Audrey and see she’s pulled up her panties, and I see her bra disappear behind the shirt she’s quickly pulling down. As she reaches for her shorts, I open the door.

I’m pushed to the side as three armed men enter the cabin. They look like Nicaraguan freedom fighters, judging by the old AK-47s they’re carrying. They check every room and yell at us while pointing toward the corner. Evan and Owen almost run out of their bedroom to join us in the corner. Audrey presses herself against me and hides behind my back for shelter. Thankfully, all kids are more or less dressed, except for me. I still need some shorts and shoes, but it’s the least of my concerns at the moment.

The guy that seems to be the leader shouts something at me in Spanish. But despite the time I spent on the island, I never really mastered the language. I was always the quiet guy in the back, keeping an eye out and letting the others talk. I can make out some bits and pieces, but when they talk this quickly, and I’m under this kind of pressure, I don’t fully understand what they’re saying.

“¿Hablas Inglés?” I stammer.

The leader looks at me and asks, “You alone?”

I nod my head and say, “Yes. Just the four of us.”

He keeps looking at us and clearly tries to determine what our relationship is. Moments later, another guy walks up with our passports. He must’ve found these on the top shelf of the cupboard in the kitchen. Damn! So much for safe-keeping. After the man hands the leader the passports, he browses through them and asks, “You… el padre… father?”

“No. I’m her guardian,” I say, pointing at Audrey. “And their parents are on a tour of the forest up north. We’re just tourists.”

“Come!” he shouts and pulls at one of the twin’s arms to make his point. The boy makes an alarmed squeak.

“Owen!” his brother shouts immediately, stepping forward to help his brother as Owen starts pulling back. There’s a lot of shouting and confusion. I need to take control, so I shout with my army voice, “STOP!” and everyone in the room looks at me.

“We’re coming,” I say calmly to the leader. And to the kids I say, “We don’t have much of a choice here. We can’t defend ourselves, and we just have to see where they take us.”

“But…” Owen starts.

“No buts. We’re going. Make sure to stay close to me, no matter what. I’ll get us out of this mess, I promise.”

Owen sizes me up and nods. I smile to let them know it’s okay and ask the leader, “Pants and shoes?” as I point toward my shorts.

He nods, and I quickly pull them up. “Make sure to wear some shoes instead of your flip-flops,” I say to Owen, who’s currently the only one wearing those.

As I start tying my sneakers, Owen wants to go to his room for his shoes, but the men stop him. A new outburst of shouting and pushing, so I point to his feet and say, “Shoes!”

“Are shoes!” the leader sternly says, and it’s clear his patience has run out.

They start directing us out of the cabin. I managed to tie just one of my sneakers, but I figure I can tie it up later. First, we need to make sure to stay together. As I walk out, I notice the camera bag on the table. Thankfully, everything is stuffed inside, so the guys probably thought it was just regular luggage.

We’re pushed forward on the beach. There’s a lot of fighting going on in the distance, judging by all the gunfire I’m hearing. We’re directed across the beach, and I see a big, former Russian personnel carrier in the distance. There are already some people inside, and they look like tourists too.

When we reach the truck, they start pointing and pushing, wanting us to get inside. I help the kids, and they get in thanks to the hands and support from the people inside. A poke from the barrel of an AK-47 in my back makes it clear I’m not getting in quick enough. I hold back my anger and get inside too.

Inside, there are about twenty other people, and seeing how they’re dressed, there’s no doubt they’re tourists like us. I glance around, and as Audrey presses herself against me on one side, the boys sit close next to me.

“¿Hablas inglés?” I ask no one in particular.

“Yes. We’re all Americans,” a balding man in his mid-forties says.

“We’re from the UK,” a pale white elderly man sputters.

“Do you know where they’re taking us?”

“No. But according to her,” the balding man says as he nods toward a woman, “they’re taking us to the Hilton.”

“Yeah. I heard them talk about it. I speak a little Spanish,” she says, clearly upset by all of this.

“Figures,” I mumble and have to hold Audrey as we’re almost thrown around the cabin due to the reckless driving.

“What do you mean?” the man asks.

“We’re hostages now. They look like Nicaraguan separatists, and they probably think they need us to prevent the US from wiping them out.”

“How do you know this?”

“I… uhm… studied this conflict in school.,” I reply, not wanting everyone to know the real reason and hoping the kids also keep their mouths shut.

“I see. I’m Nate,” the man says, extending his hand for me to shake but quickly grabbing onto the bench as we fly over another big bump.

“Scott,” I say, but my mind is doing overtime on the best strategy to keep us safe.

“Are these your kids?”

“She is,” I say, pointing to Audrey, and as I nod toward the twins, I say, “Their parents are on a tour on the island’s north side. I look after them.”

“Oh,” Nate simply says, and I’m glad he’s keeping his thoughts to himself.

The truck comes to a sudden stop, and immediately someone outside shouts, “¡Fuera de aquí!”

“We need to get out,” the woman says.

We get out, and I see we’re indeed at the Hilton hotel on the boulevard. More armed men surround us, and I notice how poorly equipped they are.

“Phone!” a chubby man with an ancient carbine rifle hanging over his shoulder shouts.

He’s holding out a bag in front of him, and we all need to put our phones inside. I briefly consider if I should just pretend to put it in there, but I can’t risk losing the kids, so I go with the flow. I can always get my hands on another one if I need to.

We’re directed toward the hotel lobby, where another group of people is waiting, guarded by a few men pointing machine guns at them. A big guy with a scar across his face and waving a golden Colt 45 around is waiting for us. I recognize him from pictures I saw on my last mission. This Carlos des Freitas. He’s the lieutenant and right hand of the drug lord wanting to take over the island. I know I need to be careful around him and hope he doesn’t recognize me as one of the soldiers demolishing their poppy fields.

“Welcome!” Carlos says theatrically and looks around the crowd.

His eyes briefly meet mine, but thankfully, he doesn’t seem to recognize me. He starts walking around, making sure everyone knows he’s the boss.

“We are now in control of the island and are now working our way into the presidential palace. You are our guests, and we want to make sure you are all safe. That is why my men will escort you to your rooms, where you will stay until we say it is safe. You are not allowed to leave the room without our permission. Is that clear, Miss?” he asks a trembling woman close to him as he stands extremely close to her, looking her in her eyes.

The woman nods shyly, and I can hear a soft sniff coming from her. I know what he’s doing. This is a textbook scare tactic he’s playing out here in an attempt to keep us under his thumb. I need to play along to keep us all safe. I can always decide what to do when we get to the room.

“We will provide food three times a day. So no need to call for room service!” he laughs, and all his henchmen are laughing with him.

“We want to keep you safe, but we need your help doing so. If any of you decide to break these simple rules, there WILL be consequences! Is this clear?” he says, shouting the last sentence.

All of the hostages nod sheepishly, and Carlos smiles wickedly. He looks at one of the men and nods. “Take them to their rooms.”

As we walk toward the stairs, Audrey slides her hand in mine, and I nod for the twins to walk in front of us so I can keep an eye on them. Behind us, an elderly lady is sobbing and whispering, “Are they gonna kill us, Bert?”

“No, Honey. This is just temporary,” a man whispers back.

We take the stairs, and on the second floor, one of the armed men points at us when we stop at room 211 and opens the door.

“Entres,” he calmly says, but it’s clear there’s no room for negotiations.

We enter the room, and the moment we’re inside, the door is locked behind us, and we hear the muffled voices of more people walking by.

“Fuck! This is bad,” Owen exclaims, and it’s clear he’s close to tears at the moment.

One look at his brother tells me the same, and judging by how Audrey is clinging to me, she’s not in a good place either. So I know I need to step up as the responsible adult here, but there are just too many unanswered questions flying around in my head.

“The fact that we’re here is actually a good sign,” I start.

“A good sign? How?” Evan snaps.

“Look, guys. I know it’s all a bit overwhelming now. But trust me. We’re valuable to them at the moment. I’m sure they put us here, so they’ve got some leverage in their negotiations. They won’t shoot us or harm us in any way. They just can’t afford that. And judging by all the shooting that’s going on in the distance, we’re probably in the safest building on the island right now.”

“Tell that to mom and dad!” Evan snaps again, and I can see a tear roll down his cheek.

I stand next to him and wrap an arm around his shoulders in an attempt to comfort him. I nod toward Owen and do the same to him

“Your parents are with a guy that knows the jungle like the back of his hand. I’m sure he took everyone on that tour with him to a safe place. He’s one of the smartest guys I know, so I wouldn’t worry too much about them. Honestly!”

“You sure?” Evan asks timidly.

“I swear! Tell you what. As soon as I get my hands on a phone, I’ll try to contact him on his satellite phone, okay?”

This visibly puts the boys at ease, and I feel their shoulders relax under my hands. Moments later, Audrey comes in and makes it a genuine group hug.

After we break the hug, I look around in the room and see we’ve got one of the more luxurious rooms in the hotel. We’ve got a small coffee table with a two-person sofa and two comfortable chairs. There’s a small kitchenette in the corner and two king-sized beds to sleep in. This could’ve been way worse.

The boys check out the bed but keep the serious expressions on their faces. So does Audrey. I try to lighten the mood, and as I look out the window, I say, “At least we can still see the ocean from here.”

“I need to take a shit,” Owen mumbles and walks over to the bathroom.

I sit down on one of the chairs and stare outside. Everyone’s clearly feeling a bit glum, and I figure I just need to give them some time to get used to the situation.

“It’s damn hot in here. They must’ve turned off the air conditioning,” Evan complains as he takes off his shirt and throws it on a bed.

As I’m looking out of the window, thinking about this whole situation, I feel worried about the stuff in our cabin. I realize I’m doomed if anyone finds the pictures on the camera or on my laptop. I’ll probably be dragged around town, tied behind a car, and buried to my neck on the beach for me to drown or starve to death. Not a very lovely idea. And I’m still not sure if I’m out of the woods with Carlos, but I’ll deal with that when we get there.

As I was thinking of a way to get everyone’s mind off the situation, Audrey said, ”Hey! I found a deck of cards! Who wants to play?”

Evan and Owen reluctantly agree, but after a few minutes of ‘Go Fish,’ they’re really getting into it, and I’m glad to see the frowns on their faces vanish before my eyes. After we play a few games, Evan offers to fill the bottle and some glasses with water for us, and when he comes out of the bathroom, he’s coughing loudly and tries to hold his arm in front of his face.

“Jesus! Something died in there!” and he makes exaggerated moves with his hands to catch his breath as he stares at his brother accusingly.

I’m glad to see the kids laugh at this, and I can’t hold back a giggle myself. I need to keep reminding myself that the here and now is way more important than worrying about stuff I can’t control.

“Listen up,” I say after the laughter dies down, “you know I used to do army stuff in the past here, right?”

“Yeah…” Owen replies tentatively.

“During one of these missions, we rocked this guys’ boat. One of them was the guy with the big scar on his face.”

“The one with the golden gun?” Audrey asks.

“That’s the one. I don’t think he recognized me, but I’m not sure. But if he does, he’ll probably take me away from you guys.”

“But…” Audrey starts.

“Don’t worry about that. I can handle myself. But if he does, I can’t help you anymore. So just try to stay as safe as you can, and I promise I’ll come looking for you. But if I can’t reach you, there’s a fail-safe. So take this,” I say as I tear one of the playing cards into three small pieces and write a number on it, “and hide it on your body somewhere.”

“What is it?” Evan asks seriously.

“It’s the number of the satellite phone from one of the guys from my team. I trust him completely, and when you tell him I told you to call him, he’ll come and help you immediately.”

“I’ll memorize it,” Owen says with a lot of confidence.

“That’s great, Owen, but I’ll feel a lot better if you hide it inside your underwear, next to your balls,” I chuckle.

“We’ll do both,” Audrey chips in.

“Great! And remember. Tell him I told…”

I’m interrupted by a knock on the door. I Motion to them to hide the card as I get up. They turn their backs to the door and quickly hide the piece of paper.

“Room service!” a dark voice says with an unmistakable laugh in his voice.

Moments later, the door opens, and Carlos walks in with three armed men behind him and a big smile across his face. He looks around and starts smiling as he sees the cards and looks at Evan’s bare chest.

“Playing strip poker?” he laughs, and the men around him start laughing too.

“Something like that,” I reply evasively but feel the tension of the situation build inside.

He looks intensely at me, and if you didn’t know any better, you’d think we’re having a staring contest. After a few moments, he smiles again and says, “I think I know you…” as he keeps looking deep into my eyes.

“I don’t think…” I start, but I’m immediately interrupted.

“You took something very valuable from me,” he continues.

“I think you’re mist-“

“SHUT UP!!” he shouts and hits me on my head with the butt of his gun.

I feel a sting throughout my head, and I see flashes in front of my eyes. But I keep a straight face and don’t give him the pleasure of hitting me. Through the flashes, I see the concerned faces of the kids, but I feel powerless to do something about that now.

“Passaportes!” he snaps and holds out his hand.

One of the men behind him hands him four passports. He opens them one by one and holds the photo in it next to the face belonging to the passport.

“Only the two of you are family,” Carlos says, pointing to the twins, “but even a blind man can see this.”

He grabs Owen’s face around his chin to make his point as he says this. Owen immediately pulls his head back and looks at Carlos with an angry face. Then, Carlos starts laughing loudly and looks at me.

“So why are these kids with you?”

“I…” another smack against my head shuts me up.

“One of my men told me what you told him,” he says quietly and glances at Audrey.

I look at Audrey and see the fear on her face. Carlos extends his hand and brushes Audrey’s cheek. The moment he touches her, Evan moves and slaps his hand away. Immediately, one of the men steps forward and punches Evan in his stomach, causing the poor kid to fall back in his chair.

“Stop it, guys!” I shout as I step forward, immediately presented with the barrel of a rifle pointed at my face. “This is between him and me!”

“Thank you,” he says overly politely. “ So… this pretty girl is more or less your daughter?”

“I’m her guardian, yes,” I say with my heart in my throat.

“So she is very valuable to you, no?”

I don’t respond to that, but the look on my face probably gives it away because Carlos starts smiling.

“You know you took something valuable from me, so…”

“I swear to God! If you…”

Before I can finish my sentence, two men grab Audrey from behind and drag her away toward the door. At that moment, everything happens really fast. Both Evan and Owen jump to their feet but are immediately pushed back down again. Their loud screams of “Audrey!” are cut short, and I can see Owen being hit on his head with a fist by one of the men.

In the meantime, I jump up and aim straight for Carlos. But he anticipated this and elbows me in my face. I try to avoid it, but I trip over the chair and almost fall down. Thankfully, I manage to avoid the elbow in my face by that, but the second I make a move to go for it again, Carlos fires a shot.

For a second, I fear he killed Audrey. But when I see the gun is pointed toward the ceiling and Carlos quickly moves it down to aim it at my face, I feel an enormous sense of relief.

“Shut the fuck up! All of you! I take the girl, and then we are even. For now,” he says, fire shooting from his eyes as he says this to me.

In the corner of my eye, I see the twins standing there, frozen and with a look of fear in their eyes. Blood is seeping from Owen’s left eyebrow, covering the side of his face. I turn to look at Audrey, and I see her open her mouth, but before she can say anything, I’m struck hard against my head, and everything turns black.

“Mr. H…” I hear in the distance. And a moment later, “I think he’s coming back.”

I open my eyes, and it takes me a few moments to focus. I see two similar-looking faces above me, and I’m afraid I’m seeing double for a moment. But when both expressions change, and I see one of their faces is partly covered in blood, I realize I’m looking at the twins.

“Wha…” I hear myself mumble in the distance.

But then I realize I haven’t seen Audrey yet. At that moment, the adrenaline shoots through my body, and I’m instantly alert. I ignore the pain shooting through my head and look at Owen’s bleeding eyebrow. It seems like it’s stopped bleeding and just needs some cleaning.

“Where’s Audrey?”

“Those guys took her. He said…” Evan starts, and I can see the tears forming in his eyes.

“How long ago?” I interrupt him.

“What?” he asks, clearly still upset, but I need to control this situation quickly.

“How long ago did they leave the room?”

“I… uhm…” Evan stammers.

“A little under two minutes ago, I guess,” Owen says.

“That’s good. We’ve still got time then. Evan, look out the window and check the main entrance. If they take her elsewhere, they’ll have to use the main entrance.”

“Okay,” Evan responds, clearly glad to see me taking the lead.

“We need to clean you up,” I say to Owen while I open the bathroom door to get some toilet paper.

I hold the crumpled paper under the tap to make it wet and carefully start cleaning up the mess on Owen’s face. As I’m cleaning him, I ask Evan, “Still no action outside?”

“Nothing. No one in or out.”

“Great. Keep your eyes on that entrance. We’re gonna get Audrey,” I say, determined, and I see Owen’s lips curve into a sly smile.

I look in the mirror and wash away some of my own blood. Now that we’re presentable and I feel the blow to my head didn’t do that much damage, a plan forms in my head.

“Listen up…” I say to the boys as we gather around near the window.

A few minutes later, I’m on the outside of the building, shimmying my way over a small strip of concrete to the next room. As I approach the window, I quickly glance inside to make sure there’s no one in there that can ruin the plan. I only see the two elderly people that were right behind us when we walked to our rooms, and I softly knock on their window.

After another soft knock, the man’s face appears near the window, and his worried look changes into a smile the moment he recognizes me. I can see him saying something to his wife, and he opens the window. I gesture toward our room, and a few seconds later, I see Owen’s legs step out and come over to us.

I enter the room, and as the man helps me get inside, I hold my index finger in front of my lips. They simply nod, and we help Owen get inside. After a few more minutes, we’re greeted by Evan. This time, Owen takes over the lookout task and keeps his eyes focused on the front entrance. I nod for Evan, the man and woman, to follow me into the bathroom. The moment we’re in, I turn on the shower and close the door, leaving Owen in the room, but he just nods understandably. The moment we’re in, I turn on the shower and close the door.

“We have to be quiet. But I need your help. My daughter was taken by these men.”

The woman holds her hand in front of her mouth, and her eyes grow wide.

“I’m sorry to hear that,” the man says sympathetically.

“Yeah. Me too. But I need your help to rescue her.”

“But you said we were valuable to them?” the woman says with a bit of disbelief.

“I know what I said. And right now, this is true. But the moment they realize they’re not getting outside support from another country, they’ll start using us to force these countries to do something,” I say, looking both of them directly into their eyes to emphasize my point.

“Using us how?” the woman asks. The man looks at her meaningfully, and then she understands. “Oh…”

“How do you know this?” the man asks me and wraps his arm around his wife’s shoulder.

“I used to do… well… Army stuff with Special Forces on this island. Can’t say too much about it, but let’s just say I know how it all works over here pretty well.”

“Oh. Okay, that makes sense. I’m Bert, and this is my wife, Annabel.”

“Nice to meet you. I’m Scott, and this is Evan. His brother Owen is in the next room, keeping an eye on the hotel’s exit. But we need to hurry. I don’t know how long they’ll keep Audrey in here.”

“How can we help?” Bert says, ignoring his wife’s look of fear.

“I don’t know how many men are guarding the hallways, so we need to find a way to lure one of them into a room. Since they know I’m in the room next door, they’ll probably come with more than one guard. That’s why we’re in here. They’ll never suspect anything. Not this quickly anyway.”

“But how do we lure them in here?” Bert asks, and I can see a twinkle of excitement in his eyes.

“You’ll have to call for help. You or Annabel need to lie down near the window or something, so the guard has to come in.”

“Lie down?” Annabel asks.

“Yeah. Fake a heart attack or something. It doesn’t have to be an Oscar performance because I’ll be hiding behind the door, and I’ll quickly take him out.”

“Won’t the other guards be alarmed?” Evan asks, and I have to hand it to him that it’s a good question.

“Good one, Evan. I’m guessing they don’t have enough men to thoroughly guard this hotel and assume we will behave. Besides that, I didn’t see any advanced comms on them, so that’ll buy us some time too. The only risk is if two guards are close together and one sees the other one go inside. But I honestly doubt they’ve got enough men to do that, so it’s pretty much a calculated risk.”

“You sure you can take him out?” Bert asks, and I see his wife looking at me with a questioning look.

“Trust me. I’ve handled worse guys than these. I can do it with one hand tied behind my back if I have to. And after I’m done interrogating him, I’ll put him in our room so you guys are safe. Okay?”

“Let’s do this!” Bert says.

I take my place behind the door. Thankfully, there’s more than enough space, so the door will open and won’t bump against me. Evan and Owen hide in the bathroom and close the door. Annabel lies on the ground near the window, taking a believable position as if she fell over. Bert kneels near Annabel’s head, looks at me, and we nod simultaneously.

“HELP! HELP ME!” he shouts.

Moments later, he does it again, and I can hear footsteps in the hallway. I nod again toward Bert, and he holds his hands under his wife’s head.

The moment I hear the key enter the lock and the loud click unlock the door, Annabel starts shaking. Then, the door opens, and through the crack, I can see the guard is alone. He stops for a second to assess the situation, but Bert acts quickly.

“Help me! I think she’s having a heart attack!” he says, giving the guard no time to think it through.

The moment the guard rushes over to Annabel, I sneak up behind him. Once I’m close enough, I wrap my right arm around his throat, place my left hand over his mouth, and my right leg locks his lower legs. Then, in the corner of my eye, I see Owen quickly get out of the bathroom to softly close the door.

The guard tries to wrestle himself free, but he doesn’t stand a chance. I choke him until he passes out. When he’s on the ground, I tie his hands and feet behind his back with the rope that hangs from the curtain rail and can be used to close the curtains. Usually totally useless, but very handy in this sort of situation.

Evan started cutting pieces from the bedsheets. Owen puts one of these pieces in the man’s mouth, but not before putting it inside his underwear, rubbing it over his dick and balls first. If the situation wasn’t this tight, I would’ve laughed, but now I just focus on controlling the situation, and I use the other cloth pieces to cover the guard’s mouth and eyes. After he’s secured, I take his AK47 and search his body. I find a spare mag and a big knife, which I place on me.

“You know some Spanish, right?” I ask Annabel, and she nods. “Will you translate, please?”

After another nod, I see the man regain consciousness, and he starts shouting. But because of the cloth both outside and inside his mouth, only the five of us can hear it. I kneel down beside him and place the knife against his throat. I look at Annabel, and I say, “I’m gonna ask you some questions. A simple nod or shake of your head is enough. Is that clear?”

Annabel translates, and the man nods. I can see the tension on Owen and Evan’s faces, but I can only hope they know there’s nothing else I can do.

“Do you know where they took the girl?”

He nods.

“Is she still alive?”

Another nod. He was a bit more convincing this time to make his point.

“If I remove the gag, will you start screaming?”

He moves his head vigorously from left to right and mumbles something inaudible.

“Good. Because the moment I think you’re going to make noise, I’ll slit your throat. Is that perfectly clear?” I say as I press the knife firmly against his throat.

I nod toward Owen, who slowly pulls down the cloth around his mouth. The guard spits out the fabric in his mouth and inhales deeply. I’m on edge here, and the moment he makes a sound, I’ll cut it off with my knife. But the man just needed fresh air, and he doesn’t scream or say anything.

“How many guards are there?”

“Viente,” he whispers, followed by Annabel’s equally soft “Twenty.”

“How many on each floor?”

He explains that the floors only have one guard and that there are four men who alternate between three or four floors. So my suspicion of them being hugely underpowered seems to be correct.

“And where is the girl?”

“El sótano… Basement,” he says.

I do quick math and conclude that they need sixteen men to guard the floors. So that leaves four or five in the basement or maybe outside.

“How many men are in the basement?”

Annabel says he doesn’t know. And judging by his pleading, I think he’s telling the truth. I know enough by now, and I put back the gag, lift the man over my shoulder and look at Bert and Annabel.

“Thank you! I’ll drop this scumbag in our room. I’ll make sure you guys will be rescued the moment I get the chance. Stay inside your room until then, and act like you don’t know anything about this. This guy never saw you, remember?”

“Good luck, Scott! Go and save that little girl!” Bert says as he slaps me on my shoulder.

“Thanks! We will. Come on, guys!”

Once we get into our room, I look at the twins. At first, I wanted them to stay here until I rescued Audrey. But now that I know the numbers, I’m pretty positive I can get the four of us out of here. And not having to go back upstairs gives me a considerable time advantage. But I have to check what they want first.

“Do you wanna wait in here while I go and get Audrey?” I ask. And their response is instant.

“Hell no!” Owen says sternly, immediately followed by his brother’s, “No way!”

“I thought so. As long as you promise to do exactly as I say, and I mean EXACTLY, you can come. But it won’t be pretty!”

“I know…” Evan says, “But we need to help Audrey!”

“Yeah!” Owen adds.

“Alright. Let’s get him in the bathtub,” I say.

Evan opens the door, and I drop the guard in the tub. I look at the boys and nod for them to leave the bathroom. They go without asking or saying anything. I look at the blindfolded and gagged man in the tub and feel sorry for him. I was planning on cutting his throat in order to buy us some more time. But seeing him like this, looking back at how terrified he was when I captured him, and especially how helpless he looks, makes me rethink my initial plan. I’m not on a job now with clear directives. I need to rescue Audrey, not kill every hostile I make contact with.

So I move my face close to his ear and whisper, “Do you understand English?” After a short pause, he nods. I doubt he’s fluent, but he knows enough. “Okay then. I’ve decided to let you live for now. But if I find out you alerted the guards, I promise I’ll make sure that I, or my friends, will find you, your family, and your friends, and we’ll make sure all of you will die the most excruciating death known to men. Is that clear?”

He nods vigorously again, and I think he understood exactly what I said, despite the language barrier between us. His nods and accompanying body language are all the confirmation I need. I check the knots in the ropes again, fasten the gag again, and pat him on his head.

“Take care,” I whisper as I leave the bathroom.

Both boys look at me with worried looks on their faces but don’t say anything. I decide to leave it like this and explain later. Them thinking of me as a ruthless killing machine can always come in handy, so I figure it’s better to leave it at that. I grab the floor plan from the door with the fire escapes clearly marked. These plans aren’t at scale but are usually pretty accurate when it comes to stairs and doors. I examine the plan, look at the boys and say, “To the right, there’s the stairway. It’s close to the elevators. Keep your head down and stay behind me.”

I slowly open the door, check the hallway and move to the right. Behind me, I hear the unmistakable sound of Owen’s flip-flops. So I pause by a big concrete pillar and crouch down. When the boys join me, I point toward Owen’s feet.

“Take those off. Put them in your pants at your back.”

Owen looks questioning at me but takes off his flip-flops and hands them to me. I turn him around, pull back the elastic band of his shorts, put the flip-flops there next to each other, and secure them with the elastic waistband of his shorts.

“There. A deaf man can hear you in these things,” I whisper.

“Told ya!” Evan whispers too and shoots a stern look at his brother.

I ignore them and move toward the stairs. The door to the stairwell doesn’t have a window in it, so I put my ear to the door. After listening intensely for a few moments, I think it’s clear.

“I think we’re good,” I whisper, “I’m not sure, so stay here for a moment.”

I grab my knife firmly in my hand and slowly open the door. But I know it’s wrong the moment I do this. I hear footsteps, and a moment later, a deep voice says, “¿Qué.”

I feel movement beside me, and before I can react, Owen stands up, grabs his dick through his shorts, and starts bouncing on his feet. As the door opens, I hide behind it the best I can, and the man coming out of it only has eyes for Owen.

“I need to pee! Where’s the toilet?” Owen says very convincingly.

“Esta…” the guard stammers, but before he can finish his sentence, I grab him from behind and take him in a neck lock.

I feel him struggling, but I know it’ll only take a minute or two for him to die. As his life flows out of him and his body collapses, I gently lay him down. I choke him for a few more moments. After I check his heartbeat and am confident he’s dead, I place him against the pillar we stopped earlier and make it look like he’s sleeping.

All the while, the boys keep an eye and an ear out in the stairwell to make sure we’re still alone. I grab the man’s handgun and knife and move over to Owen and Evan. I hand Owen the knife and say, “That was some quick thinking! Had he started calling out for his mates, this would’ve become messy. Thanks!”

Owen blushes and says, “I figured he wasn’t expecting to see a kid out here. If I had the time, I would’ve taken off my clothes. That way, the shock would be even bigger!”

“It sure would! He would’ve laughed his ass off when he saw your tiny… oh, wait,” Evan whispers.

“We need to move,” I whisper, needing them to focus. “Here,” I say as I hand Evan the gun. “You know how to use it?”

Evan’s eyes get huge for a moment, then he manages to collect himself as he takes the gun from me. “Yeah. Dad took us to a shooting range last month.”

I quickly explain to both the boys how the safety works and how to reload the gun, and we move down the stairs. When we reach the ground floor, I open the door and feel relieved to see we’re good. We quietly and quickly head over to the reception desk and hide behind it. I search the drawers and find a more detailed map of the hotel floors.

“There,” I whisper as I point to a spot on the map and then at the door a few yards away where it looks like the stairs to the basement must be. We hear footsteps approaching, and I hold my finger in front of my mouth. Both boys nod, and as the steps get louder, I see the fear spread over Evan’s face. I seek eye contact with him and try to keep him calm. The moment we hear the steps moving away, he lets out a soft sigh.

“We can’t kill them all,” I whisper. “Our first priority is Audrey.”

Both of them nod, and we crouch over to the door. I open it, and I can hear talking and laughter at the bottom of the stairs. I carefully start walking down the stairs, and at a corner, I stop and quickly look around it and immediately pull back my head. No one there.

So I move down further, and at the bottom of the stairs, there’s a long corridor. There’s an opening to the right a few feet in front of me. It’s a doorway without a door. I tiptoe over to it, signaling the boys to wait. I need to see inside the room, so I crouch down, put my head around the corner quickly and pull back. In that half a second, I count four people, and in the far left corner, there’s something on the ground that I can’t place yet.

So I glance around again and focus on that part. I see it’s a small person crawled up into a ball. This must be Audrey. But in the back of the room, there’s another doorway. There must be a whole system of corridors down here. This means I have to move quickly and make sure no one escapes through that door. I need to check one more time, but it seems that Carlos is close to both the door and Audrey.

“Fuck!” I whisper softly as I move back to the boys.

We move up the stairs a bit, and I softly explain to them what I’ve just seen.

“Is there something we can do?” Evan asks.

“Yes. I think there’s a way. I’ll enter the room, and you guys try to find that back entrance to the room. I hope I can buy you enough time so you can free Audrey.”

“What about you?” Owen asks worriedly.

“Don’t worry about that. You need to make sure to free Audrey and run for the harbor. There, you need to call the number I gave you, and you’ll be safe. You just need to make sure to get off this island safely and only worry about yourselves. I’ve been in situations way tighter than this one, so don’t worry. I will find you guys. Promise you won’t wait for me!”

Evan nods, and Owen whispers a soft, “Promise.”

“Thank you! This means a lot to me. Now, let’s get these sons of bitches, shall we?”

I get back to the door with the boys right behind me. I check my AK47 and place the spare magazine against the gun so that I can change it quickly, but I still can aim properly. I quickly glance around one last time to make a mental picture of the positions of the men in the room. I take a deep breath, take my close-quarters–combat position to enter a building shooting, and step into the light coming from the room. I hear soft footsteps behind me, indicating the boys are at it too.

My first targets are the two guys to the left of me. They’re talking to each other, and their shoulders are aimed at the door. They’ll be the first with a clear shot at me, so they have to go first.


Two precise headshots, and as the bodies crumble to the floor, I hear panicked voices. The guy to my right reacts quicker than I anticipated. He steps to his right and hides behind the book closet next to him. But I see it’s a wooden closet, and I know exactly where his head is, so I take another shot and hit him through the closet and see him fall down. Three down, one to go.

I take two steps forward, aiming for Carlos, the last living hostile in the room. He’s ducked behind a desk, but I decide to approach him carefully since Audrey’s in that corner too and considering it’s an old metal desk Carlos is hiding behind.

“Show yourself!” I shout as I approach the desk.

On the desk, I see two syringes and a bent spoon. Are these guys doing drugs in here? The syringes are filled, so I guess I interrupted them. I hear stumbling, and a second later, Carlos stands up, holding Audrey in front of him. I recognize her only by her clothes because a black bag is pulled over her head. Carlos’s golden colt is pressed against Audrey’s head, and he’s looking at me with fire shooting out of his eyes.

I aim at his head, but it’s hidden halfway behind Audrey’s, so I need a better opportunity to shoot without the chance of hurting her.

“Try me!” he says with poison in his voice. “I will not hesitate to kill her!”

I see him moving backward toward the door opening in the back of the room. I keep my gun pointed at him and say, “What a big guy you are! A grown man needing little girls to protect his safety. Your mother must be really proud!”

“DO NOT dare to talk about my mother!” he snaps.

Good! This is working. I’ve got him distracted, and I can see him loosening his grip on Audrey. Just a few more inches…

“She told me to say hi to you last night…”

“Fuck you!”

In the corner of my eye, I see Owen’s shadow. Next, I see him looking around the opening, then back over his shoulder, and a slight nod is all it takes. He quickly gets behind Carlos, with Evan on his heels. Owen lifts the knife, and the moment he moves it down, Evan reaches for the arm holding the gun. Owen plants the blade deep into Carlos’s leg while Evan yanks his arm away.


The gunshot sounds loud, but when I see concrete falling from the ceiling, I know we’re good, and I move over toward them. I immediately plant my foot on Carlos’s throat and point the gun at his face. The sounds of him trying to catch his breath fill the room, but no one seems to care. Owen pulls the knife out of Carlos’ leg, which causes him to scream while trying to catch his breath. It’s an awful sound, but I couldn’t care less.

“Take Audrey and get to the stairs,” I say to the boys

They pull the bag from Audrey’s head, and I try to make eye contact with her. Her eyes need some adjusting to the light, but after a few seconds, she starts scanning the room. The moment her eyes find mine, the worried look on her face morphs into a relieved one. I feel like we’re communicating on a more spiritual level because somehow, I can feel she’s fine and wants to know how I’m doing. Without saying anything, Audrey smiles knowingly and nods. The boys witness this, and the moment they see Audrey nod, each boy grabs one arm, helps her to her feet, and they start waking out of the room. The moment they leave, I look at Carlos.

“I hope you burn in hell,” I whisper.

Carlos opens his mouth, but before he can say anything, I pull the trigger. Blood and brain matter splash against the floor and wall. I feel absolutely nothing when I look at his half-open head. I just turn around, quickly grab the phone lying on the desk, and run toward the kids. I catch up with them halfway up the stairs. I look at Audrey, and thankfully, she doesn’t seem harmed.

“Are you okay, Lil’ Bit?”

“Yeah. Just a little dizzy.”

“Do you think you can run?” I ask.

“Yeah. I think so,” she says and tries to look tough.

“You need your flip-flops, or are you faster without them?” I ask looking at Owen.

“Without,” is all he says.

“Thanks, guys! You did great in there!” I whisper and give them a quick pat on their backs. “But now we need to move fast. The guards upstairs must’ve heard the shots. So we go for the exit, and when we’re at the street, we turn right and run toward the harbor. You run, and I’ll cover you. Don’t look back. I’m right behind you. Is this clear?”

“Yeah,” Owen whispers back, then looks at his brother. “Ready, Dude?”

Evan returns the look then turns to Audre. “Ready Dudette?” Evan asks, and she nods with a very determined look on her face.

“Three, two, one,” I say and open the door at the top of the stairs.

We’re back in the hotel lobby, and it’s surprisingly quiet. I wave to the kids to run, which they immediately do. When they reach the door, I hear footsteps running toward us in the distance. I hide behind a couch near the exit, and the moment the guy shouts, “HEY!” I get up and point my rifle at him.

Three well-aimed shots later, he falls to the ground and stops moving. I listen for a moment and don’t hear any more footsteps. So I get up and run toward the door too. In the distance, I see the three of them round the corner toward the docks. After a short run, I’m there too, with the sound of gunfire and explosions still clearly audible in the distance.

As I’m approaching the docks, I see them standing to the side, trying to hide a bit in the bushes. When they see me, they step forward and look expectantly at me. I look around and see a lot of boats. They vary from small fishing boats to big, luxury yachts. After a quick look around, my eye lands on a white Jeep Desperado standing close to us. At that moment, my mind is in overdrive, trying to figure out what to do next. I need to get the cameras and laptop I left in our cabin. But I also need to make sure the kids are safe. But then again… they’re not really safe until I get these pictures. This internal struggle lasts a few moments, and I make up my mind after one more glance at the four-by-four.

“Can you find us a boat?” I say, looking at all of them. “It needs to be at least thirty feet. I don’t care about anything else. If it’s that size, we can make it to the US in it. Of course, it’s nice if there are some supplies on board, but we can manage a day without food.”

“What about you?” Audrey asks with a bit of panic in her voice.

“I take this thing,” I say, pointing toward the Jeep, “and drive back to our condo to grab my cameras and laptop. Trust me, we don’t want anyone else to see these pictures. It’ll take me fifteen minutes tops.”

“Right,” Owen says and looks at the boy and girl next to him. “We’re looking for a boat, guys. Do we need keys or something?”

“Sometimes. But most of the time, people just leave it in there, especially on this island. Oh! And check for fuel,” I say as I climb into the Jeep, “and try to stay out of sight, okay?”

“We’ve got it covered,” Evan assures me, and he pulls the gun from the back of his waistband and shows it to me to make his point.

“Be careful,” I say as I turn the key, and the engine comes to life with a loud roar.

“You too. Come on, guys,” Owen says, and both Evan and Audrey start running after him.

I place the AK47 on the passenger’s seat, and I see one of the army hats the guards in the hotel are wearing lying there. I put it on my head, put the Jeep into gear, and drive off. It takes me a few minutes to find the beach entrance. Mainly because I want to avoid driving past the hotel’s entrance.

I manage to avoid two small groups of fighters. Since I don’t know if they’re friendlies or not, I take the longer route. Once I get to the beach, I immediately shift the Jeep into a lower gear and steer to the left, going straight for the last cabin. As I drive by the other cabins, I notice some doors are open. I feel my chest tighten, and my stomach does a backflip when I think about losing these pictures. Then, as I’m rapidly approaching our cabin, I see someone entering it.

“Goddamit!” I whisper under my breath and put the pedal to the metal.

When I’m at the cabin, I hit the brakes hard, grab my rifle, and jump out of the Jeep. I leave the engine running, just in case. I take my usual position with the AK47 pressed against my shoulder and shout, “Come out with your hands in the air!”

“¿Qué Quieres?” I hear from inside the cabin.

After a few moments, the man steps out of the front door and onto the porch with a big smile on his face. He’s holding Audrey’s tiny, sexy-as-fuck white bikini in one hand and the can of coconut oil in the other. He has an AK47 hanging by its shoulder strap over his shoulder, and on his head is the same hat like the one I’m wearing. It’s clear he’s one of Carlos’s men.

“You Mr. Harris, no?” he says with an even broader grin and continues, “Looks like someone had some fun in here…”

“Give me my stuff,” I reply with my rifle aimed at his head.

“Can’t do that. My boss asked me to get all the stuff from your cabin.”

“Carlos is dead. I killed him,” I reply, stepping closer.

“That’s… unfortunate,” the man answers but doesn’t seem impressed.

“Drop the stuff and leave before I kill you too,” I say without reacting to him.

“I’m afraid I cannot do that. El Capitan asked me to search the cabins on the beach. ALL cabins…” he says, and the smile on his face gets even wider.

“Suelta el arma,” I hear behind me, and at the same time, something metal is pressed against the left side of my head, which I can only assume is a gun.

“It means you need to drop your weapon,” the guy on the porch says with a very smug face.

I hesitate about what to do next. If there are more men around, I’m doomed. Especially since I confessed to killing Carlos. But I need to neutralize the man behind me first. Otherwise, I won’t stand a chance.

“The weapon,” the guy says politely but clearly agitated that I don’t do it right away.

“Okay. Just don’t shoot me, please.”

I loosen the grip on my rifle, take it by the barrel, and place the back of it on the ground, where it falls into the sand altogether. The moment I let go of it, I feel a slight decrease in the pressure of the gun against my head. It isn’t much, but enough for me to notice. The guy on the porch clearly feels like he’s in control completely since his rifle still hangs over his shoulder.

I trained in this situation enough to entirely rely on my instincts and experience. So I move my head back a little and quickly pivot to my right. The moment I’ve turned and my left shoulder is toward his body, my left hand grabs the top of the gun. I immediately place my right hand under the gun, slamming it upward, causing the man’s wrist and index finger to break.

I simultaneously punch against his body with the full force of my shoulder, causing the man to stumble backward. Because of his broken finger and wrist, he has to let go of the gun, which I take in my hands, point it at the guy on the porch, and fire three times. Two of the bullets hit him in his chest near his heart, and the other one lands dead center on his forehead. He started saying something, but the bullets cut his words off, and he crumples to the ground. The moment I see him go down, I turn around and fire two shots at the guy behind me. Then, when I’m sure they’re both not a threat anymore, I pick up the AK47 and hide behind the Jeep to check if someone else is coming or not. About a minute later, I’m confident I’m alone, so I run to the cabin, take the camera bag and stop for a second.

I notice Audrey’s backpack lying around, so I grab it, take some food and drinks from the cabinet and fridge, and throw it in the bag. There are a lot of clothes lying around, but I don’t see anything more that’s worth taking with us, and since time is our enemy, I grab both bags, run outside, jump into the Jeep and start driving.

The gunfire in the distance seems to grow louder, so I figure I might as well take the shortest route. I place the rifle in my lap and hold the handgun in my hand to react quickly when necessary. As I drive by the hotel, I’m extra alert but am surprised to see no one moving around in the lobby. It worries me they might have followed the kids to the docks. But when I round the corner, it’s empty too, and Owen is the only one I see, hidden behind a big trash can. When he sees me, he jumps up and points toward a big boat, of about forty feet, that looks very luxurious and has a big sail.

“They’re over there. The key is still in it, and according to Evan, it has some advanced computer-aided steering system and a full tank of gas.”

“Sounds awesome! Great job! Here,” I say as I hand Owen the backpack with the food and drinks.

Evan’s head pops out of the cabin when we approach the yacht. His worried look immediately turns into a smile when he sees me.

“Look what we found!” he exclaims.

“It’s an awesome-looking yacht! We definitely can make it back to The States in this. Are we ready to set off?”

“Scott!” Audrey shouts as she exits the cabin.

Before I know it, she flies around my neck and gives me an extremely tight hug. I hug her back, kiss her on her cheek, and whisper in her ear, “I was SO worried about you back there! I love you!”

She pulls her head back and smiles warmly at me, mouthing, “Love you too.” Next, she looks at the three of us. “Thanks for rescuing me, guys! I never doubted you’d come for me, but I was SO scared down there!” she says and kisses all of us tenderly on our cheeks.

“Of course!” Owen beams proudly as if he rescued her himself.

I know we have to talk about this at a later moment, but right now, we need to get the hell out of here. So I get behind the wheel and look at the dashboard. Thankfully, this doesn’t seem too complicated, so I wave at the twins. They’re both near one of the two hawsers, which they pull from the dock and throw on deck.

The moment we’re no longer connected to the shore, I start the engine. It’s way quieter than I anticipated, which is pretty good news. I push the throttle forward and begin steering the ship away from the dock and toward the harbor exit. Audrey and Owen each look at one side if I don’t hit anything, while Evan is at the back of the ship on the lookout for more of Carlos’s men.

When we’re almost out of the harbor, I hear a big explosion nearby. Moments later, a giant plume of smoke can be seen and judging by its distance, they’ve reached the edge of the city. I turn the wheel one last time to point the bow toward the open sea and then push the throttle hard forward, surprised by how fast the ship accelerates. Owen and Audrey join me at the wheel, and I notice Owen’s worried face. Evan also leaves his post since we’re at a safe distance from the island. I see he’s worried too, so I slow the ship down.

“They’re getting into the city now,” Owen says.

“Yeah. What about Mom and Dad? Can’t we pick ‘em up on the north side?” Evan adds.

“Just a few more miles. Then I’ll drop the anchor, and I’ll call Jack. He’ll have all the intel we need,” I reply calmly, but feeling stressed inside.

I know deep down that they’re probably safe. Jorge, the tour operator, knows the jungle like the back of his hand. And I know for a fact that Jack and my former crew are active in that area too. So the chance of them being killed and me needing to take care of three preteen kids is exceptionally slim.

I stop the boat and look for the button to drop the anchor. Audrey points it out, and I see she’s worried too. So I pull the phone I took from Carlos’s desk out of my pocket.

“Fuck! It requires a PIN!” I whisper.

“Try the easy ones,” Owen replies, and I feel the tension oozing from him.

So I try 0000 and 1234. Both fail.

“Fuck! Just one try left,” Owen says, looking at his brother.

“You’ve got your laptop with you, right?” Evan says, clearly calmer than his brother.

“Right?” I say, questioning.

“I know a trick to resetting the failure count. Try 9876. If it doesn’t work, we’ll use your laptop.”

“Okay. Here goes,” I say as I press the numbers on the screen.

The phone unlocks, and I’m greeted by a background picture of Carlos, holding his golden gun and with two bikini-clad young girls next to him. These girls are probably no older than eight or nine years old and look scared at the camera.

I decide to ignore it, open the phone app, and dial the satellite phone number.

“Hello?” I hear after a minute or so.

“Jack? It’s Scott.”

Jack and I talk for a while, and I quickly learn that they indeed rescued a group of tourists and took them back to their camp for safety. I describe Luke and Miranda, and he’s positive they’re also with that group.

I also learn that the group trying to take over the island is small. A little too small, according to Jack. We agree that that’s probably the main reason why the hotel is so badly guarded. He assures me that they’ll also liberate these people after the Colombian army joins them on the island.

“Can we help? We’re on a small boat, so maybe we can help evacuate?”

“Nah. No need. Way too many people here. The army will start evacuating them as soon as they’re up to speed here. I guess that in a day or three, maybe four, they’ll airlift people off the island and bring them to The States.”

“Then we’ll go there too. Please tell the parents that we’re heading for the Keys, okay?”

“Of course!”

“Thanks, man! We’ll talk when we get there. You know you’re the best, Jack!”

“No problem. Just throw us the next barbecue, and we’ll call it even,” he laughs.


“Later,” he says, laughing loudly.

I hang up the phone and look at the boys. The look on their faces is terrible. Owen has tears in his eyes, and it’s clear that Evan is trying to act all tough, but his whole body language tells me something else.

I smile at them and say, “Your parents are safe. They’ll probably get to the US in about four days.”

I barely get the chance to finish my sentence as I’m getting tight hugs from both similar-looking sexy boys. Moments later, Audrey joins the hug, and I feel all of the last day’s events flow out of me.

It’s late in the afternoon as I look through the manual of this ship. I had already lifted the anchor and started the engine. The dashboard of this ship is pretty complex, but there has to be some sort of autopilot on it. I just can’t find how to activate it. I start feeling a bit frustrated, but when I look at the deck, I’m greeted by three magnificent-looking preteens coming out of the hull to chill. They’re carrying some food, two bottles, and four glasses, and they walk toward the lounge area on deck. I’m delighted to see them all relax after this exciting and dangerous day.

When I find the part about the autopilot, I feel a bit embarrassed about how easy it is. Just three buttons, the destination coordinates, and the option to use the engine or sails. I choose sails, so we preserve fuel, and after a few more minutes of checking everything and the sails opening up, I’m confident we’re on our way home. Of course, I feel a bit of sadness about how I left my beloved island wash over me, but when I look at the lovely kids with me now, I know I did the right thing.

I glance over and see the three of them lounging on the white, half-circle-shaped couch on the deck. The way they act around each other brings a smile to my face.

“We’re on autopilot now, so it’ll take us around four days to get to Key West. The autopilot will keep us going all night if we want to. We’ll decide what to do once we approach the mainland, okay?”

“Sounds good! Why don’t you join us?” Audrey asks, gesturing toward the couch.

I look at the table and see they’ve also taken the backpack. I’m not sure if we’re good on food yet, so I just have to ask.

“Is this all the food we’ve got?”

“No. Not at all! There’s LOTS of food down there. We can last weeks if we have to!” Owen smiles broadly.

“And we’ve got champagne,” Evan smiles, holding up the bottle.

“Yeah. Apparently, we took some old rich dude’s boat,” Owen chuckles.

“I’ll make sure he gets it back. All’s fair in love and war, so I’m sure I won’t get in trouble for it! And if I do, I’ll cross that bridge when we get there.”

With a loud ‘pop,’ Evan opens the champagne bottle, which surprises me. And the moment the champagne starts oozing out of the bottle and onto the deck, we hear a big explosion behind us. I look around, and another big, black cloud of smoke rises up from the island.

“Oh,” Evan says timidly. “I thought we’d celebrate Audrey’s and Mom and Dad’s rescue. But…”

“I know,” I say a bit glumly, “But I’m sure the island will be freed from these assholes. Jack told me the Columbian army is on its way. I just hope there’s something left for them to liberate.”

“I’m sure it’ll all be fine,” Audrey says reassuringly and puts her arm around my shoulder.

“Let’s hope so,” I reply, already feeling a bit less glum about it, and say, “Well, there’s nothing we can do now to help the islanders. We’ll just have to make sure to get back to The States. So let’s toast to being free,” I say as I pick up my glass, holding it toward Evan.

He fills my glass, and the others follow my example, also holding up their glasses. Finally, after Evan fills his own, I raise my glass and say, “Here’s to getting off the island safely!”

Moments later, our glasses touch and Evan adds, “And to the safe return of mom and dad!”

We all approvingly mumble something in response to that and drink some champagne. I can feel myself relax as I feel it slide down my throat and look around me. In the distance to my left, there’s the island, where all evidence of explosions and such is gone, and to my right, the sun starts setting but is still high enough in the sky to be comfortably warm for at least an hour or so.

“So…” Owen starts with the tone in his voice which usually means some smart-ass remark is coming my way. “It’ll be three to four days before we see other people, right?”

“Something like that, yeah,” I reply hesitantly.

“That means I can get rid of these, doesn’t it?” he asks as he pulls on the fabric of his shorts to prove a point.

That little bugger! I know he’s right, but this is the absolute last thing I’m thinking about at the moment. But knowing how much of a pair of nudists they are, I can’t blame them. So I start laughing and say, “I don’t see why not! It’s just the four of us for the coming three days, so why don’t we work on those tan lines. Right, Lil’ Bit?”

Owen starts wiggling out of his clothes, and moments later, his brother follows suit. I assume it takes Audrey a moment for this all to land because there’s no action on her part for a few heartbeats. But when it does, she doesn’t waste any time and is standing there in just her panties, looking expectantly at me. When I look over at the boys and quickly glance at their flaccid dicks hanging over their tight ballsacks, I notice they’re looking at me too.

“What!?” I ask as if I don’t have a clue why they’re looking at me.

As Audrey matter-of-factly slides her panties down her legs, she says to no one in particular, “We’ve got a party pooper on the ship. I repeat… party pooper on board!”

Both boys start giggling, and their little dicks wobble with each movement of their bodies. I guess they don’t want to be a part of this thing between Audrey and me, as they let themselves fall back onto the couch and look at us with obvious amusement.

“Party pooper, you say?” I say with mock surprise.

“Yeah. That’s what I think you are,” she says, looking at me like a true diva with her hand on her hip.

As I once more drink in the sight of her perky, hot, and nubile young body, I softly say, “Guess you need to do something about that, don’t you?”

Audrey’s eyes light up, and I see the twins start to move in the corner of my eye. I willingly am helped to my feet, both boys chuckling and giggling. Before I know it, six small hands are tugging at my shorts and t-shirt. Moments later, I’m as naked as the kids, and their hands are roaming all over my body.

Because of all the groping and rubbing, I fall back on the bench, where Audrey quickly climbs on my lap, kissing me deeply and rubbing her pelvis against mine.

“Slow down, Lil’ Bit! We’ve got all evening, night, AND three days after that. So let’s enjoy it, okay?”

She nods shyly, and as the boys take their spot on the bench and Evan refills our glasses, she whispers, “I put a lot of oil up my bum. I want your thing in it again,” into my ear.

After hearing that, my hard cock twitches violently against her pussy, causing her to smile wickedly before she leaps off my lap and cuddles up next to me on the bench, grabbing her glass.

We make some small talk, but I can feel the sexual tension between us rise quickly. My dick has gone soft by now, and I start to feel more and more relaxed as I lounge around naked with these kids. But the movement in Owen’s lap grabs my attention. With each heartbeat, his dick rises, and he seems oblivious to it.

“Dude!” Evan chuckles as he looks at his brother.

“What?” Owen asks innocently but with a wicked smile.

Audrey and I are looking at each other as she talks about something funny that happened at school a few weeks back, but when she hears the boys talk, she glances over and asks with a twinkle in her eyes, “Need some help with that?”

Owen smiles sheepishly and simply nods. Audrey gets up and crawls onto the table on her hands and knees toward the other side like a cat, reaching out for Owen’s boner. Owen immediately gets the idea and gets to his feet.

Before he can say or do anything, Audrey latches her mouth onto his dick, and a soft moan escapes his throat as she slides her lips down his shaft. Evan immediately gets to his feet too, not wanting to be left out.

“I’m taking turns this time,” she giggles as she looks at the boys, who sheepishly nod again.

She starts alternating between the two hard, adolescent dicks in front of her face. Seeing her working these dicks like an experienced cocksucker makes me vaguely proud about how quickly this girl picks up on this stuff.

I’m watching this spectacle from right behind Audrey’s butt, which sticks invitingly into the air and moves seductively from left to right as she’s sucking the twin’s cocks. I love the look on the boy’s faces, and as I’m watching them and contemplating if I should do something with Audrey, she lifts her head from one of the dicks barely long enough to look back at me over her shoulder, asking, “What are you waiting for?”

I feel a bit silly for still doubting if I should participate. Especially when the boys start urging me on too. They WANT me to join them in their sex play. I have to keep reminding myself about that.

“The oil is next to the couch,” Evan points to me.

Currently, Audrey is working his brother’s hard cock, so Evan is observant enough to notice. I look on the floor, and there’s the can of oil. I don’t know how or when Audrey prepared all this, but there’s no doubt in my mind that she wants my hard cock up her butt and fuck her brains out. My caveman instinct is taking over again. This time, I know she can handle me, so I make very little effort to push him back to let the voice of reason take over.

No. I need to lube up and stick it inside that little girl’s ass. I need to slide it in, fuck her hard, and coat her insides with every drop of cum my balls have to offer. And she’s going to take it like a pro. I just know it! As I open the can of oil and generously coat my dick with it, I see her rosebud open and close in front of me. She’s clearly been practicing how to use these muscles, and it turns me on immensely.

Since I’m all lubed up and horny as fuck, I get to my feet and step forward. My legs are a bit shaky, but as I’m closing in on her backside, I notice how this table is almost at the perfect height. I push my dick down a bit, so it’s practically horizontal, and all I have to do now is take another small step, and I’m pressed against her entrance.

The moment my dickhead touches her anus, I hear her moan loudly. Both boys look at me, and I hear one of them say, “Go for it, Mr. H!” followed by a moan as Audrey switches dicks.

I don’t say anything. Instead, I place my hands on her hips, and I apply just a little bit of pressure to let her know I’m ready for it. When she realizes what I’m about to do, she relaxes her sphincter, and my slippery dickhead pops in with ease. Damn! This girl is a quick learner!

Her ass muscles clamp tightly around my dick, but she isn’t as tight as before. It’s still extremely tight, but now it just feels more… relaxed. My caveman brain is still in full swing, and I start sliding in without worrying too much about Audrey. But according to the deep grunts and moans coming from her, she likes what I’m doing.

As I’m over halfway inside of her, the ship hits a wave, and I slightly lose my balance, causing me to slide that last bit in at once.

“Aahhhh!” she moans loudly, but it doesn’t sound as painful as I expected.

“You okay, Lil’ Bit?” I worriedly ask, my hands firmly on her hips and my hard cock buried to the hilt in her ass.

“Ooohhh… yeah… it’s just… I need a sec.”

My right hand reaches around her, and as I move it down over her lower abdomen in search of that sweet spot, she moans again. The moment my index finger finds her swollen and slippery clit, she instinctively pushes her butt back and starts grunting. I rub over and around her slick button, and as I start moving my cock in and out of her ass, she starts squirming.

I suddenly have an incredible urge to feel her body against mine, and my caveman brain figures there’s an easy way to fix this. So I let go of her clit and wrap my arms around her slim body. My left hand firmly grabs her right boob, and when I feel I’ve got a strong enough grip on her, I pull her up against my chest, making sure to keep my dick buried deep inside her back door.

She squeals as I lift her, but it’s a squeal of delight. Her hands search for support, and after grabbing just air, they land on my hips. But I have no intention of keeping a standing position, so I step back and ease myself slowly down onto the couch as smoothly as possible. As my butt hits the cushion, her ass slides down even further down my cock, and I let out a loud moan. Audrey plants her feet at the front of the couch and pushes herself up a bit before sliding down again. To me, it feels like she’s testing the position we’re in, but I fully understand her need of testing the water.

Her back is still firmly pressed against my chest, and as my left hand keeps kneading her right tit, I savor the feeling of her lovely body against mine. We are slowly starting to fuck again, and we’re getting into a slow rhythm together before long. I sense we’re on the same page here and not aiming for a quick orgasm but a nice, long and intense fucking session. There’s less urgency in our movement but more focus on the things we like. I guess the experience they’ve gained up until now is the cause of that.

Audrey moans something inaudible, and in my peripheral vision, I see some movement. I look at the boys, and as they’re getting over to us, their bobbing boners lead the way, and they’ve got some shit-eating grins on their faces. They kneel down in front of us and between our spread legs. Their faces dip between our legs, and when Audrey lets out a loud, primal grunt, it’s clear what’s the cause of that.

But, moments later, the feeling of a mouth sucking in one of my balls surprises me, and I instinctively push hard into that tight little girl’s ass I’m pounding at the moment. Then, when I get used to the feeling of the lapping tongue and mouth all over my balls, I slow down my thrusts a little. I don’t want to cum yet. I need this moment to last. But the squirming body against my chest has different plans.

“Aaahh… aaahh… aaahh…” Audrey moans, followed by a high-pitched, “cummmmiiiinnngggg…”

Her body stiffens, and her ass muscles clamp around my pumping dick. This isn’t one of the earth-shattering orgasms she had before, and she’ll probably have about half a dozen more before I’m done with her, but I absolutely love the feeling of her shaking body in my arms.

She lets go of my hips and reaches down for the boy who ate her out. The mouth on my balls lets go, and I can see one of the boy’s faces appear, and he lip-locks with Audrey after he gets up completely. He presses his body firmly against hers, and I just love the feeling of this extra pressure on me. I notice his humping motion and feel the tip of his dick rub against my bald balls a few times. His instinct is to aim for a pussy to sink his dick into, take over, and I feel the need to help him.

So I reach around, grab both his ass cheeks and pull him up and toward us. Less than a second later, I feel the underside of our dicks touch, with only the soft, thin flesh of Audrey’s insides separating us. Wanting to keep it as comfortable for Audrey as possible and learning from past experiences, I pull back the moment the boy slides in.

“Aaaahhhhh!!! YESSSS!!!” Audrey practically screams, slams her head back, and lays it on my shoulder.

The boy looks at me with the horniest look I’ve ever seen. Then, without needing to talk, I feel I need to push back in, and he starts sliding out.

“Owen?” I ask hoarsely, guessing the boy’s name.

He just nods, leans in, and starts Frenching me violently. I close my eyes as I’m overwhelmed by all the stimulation my body is receiving. There’s this preteen cock sliding over mine. The hot, tight, and slippery inside of this sexy girl pressed against my chest. The tight ass I’m holding of this sexy Adonis, who’s Frenching me with everything he has inside of him.

I just have to open my eyes again. I want to see everything that’s happening in front of me and memorize as much as possible. I then notice Evan placing the can of oil back next to me on the couch. Moments later, Owen stops kissing me, his eyes fly open, and a loud moan comes from deep within his throat. When I feel Evan’s hips press against my hands, I realize that at that moment, almost every available hole is filled with a cock.

Owen moves his face over in search of Audrey’s, and as Evan picks up the pace, so are Owen’s moans. I need to stay focused because Evan is determining Owen’s pace of fucking Audrey now. I need to match it in the opposite way, which is quite challenging initially.

Evan reaches his face over his brother’s shoulder in search of mine, and we start kissing furiously while picking up the pace. Audrey’s body feels like a ragdoll against my chest, and the primary grunts coming from her are sexy as fuck and extremely encouraging. I also realize that Owen and I are pistoning in and out at the same time now, filling her up as we enter her. There are no groans of discomfort or winching of her body. Nothing like that, just encouraging moans and grunts to fuck her as hard and deep as possible.

Of course, this can’t last forever. I feel Audrey having a few ‘little orgasms,’ as she calls them, but because of all the action, they’re pushed back right away, all accumulating to that one big explosion. As Evan moans into my mouth getting louder and more intense, I hear Owen’s now-familiar high-pitch grunts. He’s close to cumming, but has to match his brother’s rhythm, which is clearly not fast enough, judging by his pleading moans.

And that’s when Audrey sets off a chain event. A big, loud, bellowing scream from deep inside her triggers my point of no return. I slap hard into her with all the force I can master in this position. Her body starts shaking on my chest, and I’m surprised by what happens next. One second, she’s shaking, the other, she’s completely limp.

I know she’s fine, judging by her deep breaths. And since she’s experienced these intense orgasms before and almost acted the same during these, I focus on one of my most intense orgasms ever. As Audrey’s shaking continues, I feel Owen’s ass muscles tighten under my kneading hands. The moment his dick starts kicking against mine and his cute, high-pitched grunts fill my ears, I lose it. The dam breaks, and I slam in one last time, as deep and hard as I can. I feel my balls pull up, touching Owen’s, and the stream of cum fills my ejaculatory tunnel. A heartbeat later. I start coating the insides of my little lover.

I don’t know how many spurts filled her up. All I know is that I almost passed out from the sheer pleasure. Owen’s kicking dick keeps rubbing over mine, and I realize Evan is still pumping his brother’s ass. I’m still spurting too, and the moment Owen’s dick rubs over mine one last time, I feel like I’m coming again. I had never felt this before. I had an orgasm during an orgasm. That’s the only and best way to describe it. Evan’s hips shake against my hands, and the same grunts his brother grunted moments before are filling the air.

All the while, Audrey is still cumming. This lasts a few more minutes, which I find both impressive and highly erotic. But I don’t have any more to give her at this moment. So we lay there in a panting heap of sweaty bodies, all trying to come down from our orgasmic highs. My dick stays hard for a while but eventually slips out with a squishy sound, and cum dribbles out over my dick and balls.

“I can do this all day,” Audrey mumbles between Owen and me, and we all start laughing at that.

But it turned out we almost did it all day long, for four days straight. I had never felt this sexually drained in all my life. We tried every possible position we could think of, even one Owen came up with, where Audrey had to bend forward and had her head between her knees.

Audrey’s favorite was the airlock. We did that one several times, and she just loved having every hole filled with a cock. We also learned that Audrey loved to be covered in cum. And in the end, she wouldn’t let us cum inside her anymore. Instead, she’d lay down on the deck, and the three of us had to spurt over her, hosing her down and covering her in cum.

I’m reminiscing all this as I’m standing at the wheel after disabling the autopilot. I remember the look on the kid’s faces after telling them they need to wear some clothes again. Key West is approaching, and so is the chance of sailing past another boat filled with people. I tell them I can’t explain to these people why there’s a grown man on board with three naked kids. And when I drop the word ‘prison’ again, they all reluctantly go down and put on their clothes.

“This is the US coastguard. Identify yourself,” I hear over the radio the moment we enter the US territorial waters.

“This is Scott Harris bringing back refugees from La Isla de Aquinas. We’re US citizens, requesting to dock in Key West.”

“We were told you were coming. Welcome home, Mr. Harris.”

I look relieved at the kids, who all have broad smiles of relief across their faces. As I glance at Audrey and how amazing she looks in her tank top with her hair dancing in the wind, this brings me back to the hospital right after she was born.

Glenn and I stood there looking at the little baby, lying there under a blanket, peacefully asleep. Glenn wrapped his arm around my shoulder and pulled me close. I could even feel he was emotional, and I felt all mushy inside too.

“She’s absolutely amazing, isn’t she?” he asked.

“She’s wonderful! I’ve never seen anything more beautiful.”

“I think she even looks a bit like you,” he chuckled.

“No way! Really?” I replied, feeling flattered.

“Yeah, she does. A Lil’ Bit…”

The End.

Copyright 2022 – Jason Crow
All rights reserved

Hoc erat ultimum cap. Si clausurae opus est, epilogum lege. Sed non auctor est. Mitte mihi nuntium, si hanc fabulam probaverunt.

Another pretty abrupt ending, I admit. But it was always clear to us to end this story after they’re safe and sound back in the US. And the last line being all about the explanation of the Lil’ Bit nickname was E-o-F’s more than an excellent idea!

At first, there would be a little more closure about them getting back home, but that was about it. But I really like this ending. There are lots of opportunities for them to keep their relationship going. Or not. Everything is still on the table, and I like that! This way, you, the reader, are free to imagine a suitable ending that YOU want.

But I know you also invested time and energy in reading this story. So that’s why I removed some of the closing stuff and wrote an Epilogue. But if you think the story is fine the way it is, leave the epilogue alone. If you’re curious about how I see the ending, be my guest. Story-wise there isn’t anything left. The epilogue just ties some loose ends together.

Enough about the epilogue. E-o-F, and I would love to read your comments! How did we do? What was good, what was terrible, what could be better? You know… the works. Just comment on the website or drop me an email at or, and I promise I’ll read it. I always try to reply, but if the flow of emails is too great, I might miss one or two.

We hope you enjoyed the story. To me, it was a lot of fun getting to know the characters and imagining how they were developing. I think it’s a pretty rounded story in the end. Not too much action or conflict in it, but more focus on the sexy bits this time.

Thanks for reading, and keep an eye out on the website for more stories, eye candy, watchlists, etc.

Jason and E-o-F

Here’s the download link to this chapter’s audio file: Link

Now that all chapters are published, the complete audio book is available on the story page and in the audio book section. Direct links:








La Isla de Aquinas – Chapter 17

A little word upfront. As the chapter’s title suggests, this one isn’t written by me. E-o-F (check out his other stories) helped me out a lot with planning and plot for the overall story. When I asked him to co-write, he was a little hesitant at first. And in hindsight, I’m glad we didn’t go down that path! I’ve got tremendous respect for him as a writer, and he’s got a lot of good ideas, which help me in both better stories and make me a better writer. But it’s just that we’ve got totally different styles, and writing the entire story together just wasn’t going to work. Him being an Architect and me being a Gardener… (check here for more info)

But he did offer to write a chapter. Well… A chapter… At 36K words, it’s actually a lot longer than most stories on this site (or Nifty, for that matter)! But damn!! It’s HOT!

As I already pointed out in the summary of this story, but can’t stretch enough: Thank you, Ed! Because of you, the story came out WAY better than I ever could’ve imagined. And your contribution with this chapter is an asset to this story in particular, but the entire (niche) writing scene in general!

Have fun with this one!

Chapter 17 – E-o-F’s Long Guest Chapter: No plot advancement, but a lot of sex!

I feel air moving across my entire body as I start to wake up. It’s warm and humid in the cabin, even with the windows open, and in my sleep, I’ve kicked away the light blanket. I force my bleary eyes open, and the first thing I see is that I’m surrounded by the forms of three naked children who are sound asleep.

Not a bad way to wake up, all things considered! I let my gaze drift over their fit young bodies. Beside me, one of the twins (I can’t tell which one) is sprawled out on his stomach, turned around with his head at the foot of the bed. At the extreme other side of the bed is his brother, on his side and facing away. Finally, there’s Audrey, who is nestled right up next to me on her back in the middle of the bed, her legs comfortably splayed apart. My heart skips from the love I feel for her, overjoyed with the knowledge that she has the same feelings in return for me. And VERY happy that she enjoys the physical pleasures of open and free sex just as much as the twins or I do. I sigh in satisfaction as I look around, barely in need of lifting my head to get a great view of all three holes I had my cock in just a few hours ago.

I’m a bit surprised at the lack of remorse I feel as I think about what happened last night. After resisting the urge to go all the way with Audrey for as long as I did, and then with the temptation of these beautiful boys being left in my care, you’d think I should feel the tiniest bit ashamed for giving in and “molesting” them. But I really don’t! The kids knew exactly what they wanted, and they had a wonderful time exploring their sexuality with me. Their first day of really experiencing what sex is all about went pretty much as ideally and pleasurably as anyone could ever want. Why should I be ashamed about that?

That it was the best sex I’d had in years, maybe EVER … that was just icing on the cake!

It would be nice to be able to just lay here and ogle over their sexy bodies, but nature is calling. I carefully scoot my way down between them and pad to the bathroom. As I relieve myself, I catch a whiff of the smell of sex wafting off of my body, so I hop into the tub for a shower. I’ve always been really light on body hair, but it feels a bit weird to wash my junk and feel nothing but smooth skin where my pubes and treasure trail used to be. I like it, to be sure, but it’s still weird. When I come out in my robe, the kids haven’t moved a muscle. I admire their forms again for a moment but then drag myself out to the kitchen to start making us some breakfast.

It doesn’t take long for the aroma of eggs and toast to wake the twins. I’m flipping a simple omelet over in my frying pan as they stagger out of my bedroom, one rubbing his eyes while the other scratches his back. Of course, they’re also both still unabashedly naked, their junior-sized morning wood proudly standing at attention.

“Morning, Mister H,” they mumble in unison.

“Good morning, boys,” I reply, grinning at their complete lack of modesty. “Is Audrey awake?” They both shake their heads sleepily. I’m not surprised. She got quite the workout last night. But then, so did these two. “You have a good sleep after…” I nod meaningfully toward their erect dicks, “you know… everything we did?”

Perfectly synchronized smiles of satisfaction grow on their tired faces. How do they do that?

“Yeah, I slept great!” replies one of the boys. I look down to his groin and see the telltale birthmark just above his cock. This is Evan. Jeez, how will I ever tell these two apart if they aren’t naked?

“Me too. I was really out of it,” says Owen, absently running his fingers over his freshly-shaven bare pubes and then giving his cock a quick tug.

“That’s good,” I say. I pause before my next question and am further interrupted by two slices of bread popping up from the toaster. I toss them onto a plate and begin spreading a pat of butter over the toast. It’s a little awkward, but I feel I should ask. “So, guys, how’s your… you know… your buttholes doing? Everything feeling alright back there?”

Owen lets go of his dick and reaches behind himself to run a finger over his rosebud. He turns to his brother for confirmation. “Maybe a little sore?”

“I guess,” Evan says as he performs his own casual self-examination of his backdoor. Then he grins brightly up at me. “But I’m good, I think!”

“Yeah, I’m good too!” Owen agrees, nodding enthusiastically at me. “It was totally worth it. It was SO awesome! Do you think we can do it again?”

“Oh yeah, can we?” Evan asks me with equal enthusiasm. “I’d be okay to do it again right now!”

“Me too!” Owen adds quickly, as always on the same page as his brother.

I chuckle, almost disbelieving at how these cheeky boys are practically begging me to fuck them again! I raise my hands. “Guys, not so fast. I’m cooking us breakfast here! Have a seat.” The twins look a little sheepish, and they pull out chairs to sit at the small table in the cabin’s kitchen. Still nude, of course. As I make up two plates of omelets and toast and add some fruit to the side, I have to admit that I’m distracted by the thought of sinking my cock back into those perfect little boy pussies again, as evidenced by my robe tenting out from my groin.

But then I consider something else. In the last twenty-four hours, I’ve helped introduce these kids to some new and delightful things, but I feel like I’m being selfish, wanting to just fuck the twins again. Instead, I should be thinking more about them and offering to educate them on more sources of pleasure. After all, we’re not going to be alone here for all that long: their parents will be back tomorrow afternoon or evening. They won’t have such free access to Audrey for any longer than that, either. So once they’re back with their parents, they won’t have anyone to safely and regularly play around with. Other than each other, that is.

My internal light bulb suddenly switches on. Oh, shit! They’ll have each other!

I place the plates of food in front of the boys, and they happily attack their meals. As I load up a plate of my own, I try to consider the reasons to not suggest what I’m thinking of suggesting to them, including the possibility that they might get freaked out by the idea. But frankly, I’m confident the positives outweigh the negatives.

Sitting down at the table with the twins, I clear my throat. “So guys, regarding after breakfast, having some more fun … I’m just now thinking that you could try something a little different, instead of the same thing as last night.”

Owen’s eyes widen. “You mean instead… you want us to do… IT… to YOU?” Evan’s eyes grow just as wide in obvious interest.

I honestly hadn’t been thinking in that way, and I chuckle. “We could also try that! But first, I had something else in mind.”

“Whattaya mean?” they answer, perfectly in sync.

“I mean, have you considered that you could try having sex with…” I raise my eyebrows and wave my hand back and forth between them, “… well, with each other?”

It’s interesting to watch their faces as they process what I’ve just said. For a second, they seem lost in their own thoughts, then they glance at each other tentatively at the same instant. They stare at one another for a long moment, not saying a word yet somehow communicating. I swear they have some kind of twin telepathy.

They don’t really stop looking at each other as Evan finally replies first. “I don’t know, Mister H.”

“Wouldn’t that be… kinda gross?” adds Owen.

I shrug. “Any more gross than what we did last night?”

They look with uncertainty at me and each other. This is tricky. They’re on the fence: not enthusiastic, but they’re also not rejecting the idea outright. Considering what they’ve done with me already, I could probably get them to do anything I want. But I prefer that they make their own decisions. I never felt like Glenn manipulated me into anything back in the day, and I don’t want that to change now that I’m the adult.

I decide to just explain things as I see them. “Okay, the word for the kind of things we’re talking about is ‘taboo’. Most people usually consider things that are taboo to be wrong or forbidden, but regardless can be fun and enjoyable if you want it. In fact, the thrill is often even greater BECAUSE it is taboo. It can feel good to be naughty and break the rules.”

I point out towards the beach. “Just yesterday afternoon, you did a lot of taboo things and broke a LOT of rules. Sex between you two and Audrey, at your age… even though all three of you loved it, I think you know you can’t tell your mom and dad about that.” The boys grin and nod in understanding.

“Then there’s what the two of you did with me,” I say, pointing to the bedroom. “I’m sure you’ve been taught since you were little to never let an adult touch you the way I did.” The twins nod again, more soberly. “That was VERY taboo and extremely illegal for me! I will definitely go to prison for years if you tell anyone about that! And yet, based on how excited you were a minute ago, it seems neither of you has any problem with anything that happened.”

“We don’t!” they reply in chorus, both visibly upset by the idea that I could get into serious trouble after our exploration.

Owen is downright agitated by the idea. “We’d never tell anyone,” he promises me.

“No way!” chips in Evan in agreement.

I give them a thankful smile. “I appreciate that. But my point is that now you’ve already seen how you’ve been told that certain things are bad and you shouldn’t ever do them, but it turns out not all taboo things are bad for everyone. If you try something, and you like it and aren’t hurt by it, it’s your choice. Even if you can’t let everyone know because they wouldn’t understand.” I wave my hand back and forth between them. “Doing stuff with each other is exactly the same. I’m sure you know the term ‘incest’, and most people would indeed be upset with you if you tried that kind of play. But they don’t have to know.” I shrug. “You don’t have to do anything if you don’t want to, but the way I see it, if you feel safe and happy with what you’ve done with Audrey and me, how could it possibly be worse if it’s with each other? Who cares about you more, or is looking out for you guys more… than YOURSELVES? Right?”

Neither one of them says anything to that: not out loud anyway, but they are looking at each other quizzically. I figure I shouldn’t put pressure on them. “You know, you guys should talk this out privately. We can alwa-”

“Wait,” interrupts Evan awkwardly. “If we… I mean…”

“If we did want to… you know…” mumbles Owen, “uhm… try somethi-”

The question is cut off as we hear a noise from the bedroom. It’s the adorable sound Audrey makes when she stretches. A moment later, she saunters in to join us, gloriously and shamelessly nude, and my heart skips again. It is impossible to not admire the sensual form of her body, including her pert breasts and completely bald little pussy. Damn! “Good morning, guys!” she proclaims cheerfully, already wide awake. She slides between the twins’ chairs and gives each one a quick kiss and a tight body-on-body hug. Even with their deeply tanned skin, I can see them both blush. It takes me a moment to realize that I feel no jealousy towards the boys for receiving Audrey’s attention. Even though I have real feelings for her, I’m still happy that she can be sexy with the twins, as well. Then she comes around the table to me. “Good morning, Scott!” she proclaims, her eyes twinkling. Instead of a standing hug, she hops up on my lap and straddles me while planting a deep, tongue-wrestling kiss on me. My hands fall onto her little ass cheeks to hold her while I grow to full staff beneath my robe. Oh, wow! Good morning, indeed!

I pat her butt and break the kiss. “Enough, Lil’ Bit!” I playfully admonish her as she smirks at me. “Let me get up and make you some breakfast.”

“It’s okay. I’ll get myself some cereal,” she replies, climbing off my lap with a sly look at my groin. “You don’t have to ‘get up’.” I snort and swat at her ass again. She squeals happily and scurries to the cupboard.

I direct my attention back to the twins, remembering that we were interrupted. “Sorry, you two. You were saying…”

Owen stares at his plate. “It’s nothing, Mister H.”

“Yeah, it’s nothing,” agrees Evan softly.

For a moment, I’m confused. The boys had just been sounding like they were warming up to the idea of sexual play with each other. Then it clicks for me that they are still hung up on the taboo nature of that. And that one of the people they think might be grossed out by them thinking of doing stuff like that is now standing at the counter pouring out a bowl of Rice Krispies.

Usually, I’m not the type to force a “sink or swim” situation on anybody, certainly not a couple of young boys who have reason to be feeling vulnerable at the moment. But the twins don’t know Audrey like I do, and I absolutely KNOW how she will feel about this whole incest thing. So I waste no time. I look both of them in the eye in turn, and as calmly and reassuringly as I can, I quietly say, “Please trust me.” Then with no hesitation, I call over my shoulder, “Hey, Audrey. After everything that happened yesterday, what would you think about Evan and Owen if they were to want to try messing around with each other?” The boys instantly gape at me in mortified horror.

But my instincts about my young charge are correct. “Oh?!” Audrey exclaims loudly, turning to the twins. “That would be AMAZING!! I kind of was figuring you were already doing stuff together! But you haven’t yet?” Shellshocked, the boys shake their heads. “Oh, man! This is AWESOME!! Can I watch it? Please, can I watch??”

“Hold your horses, girl,” I say, chuckling at the twins’ wide-eyed expressions. “They haven’t decided what they want to do yet.” Audrey squees excitedly as she finishes pouring milk on her cereal. “If anything!” I add sternly, causing Audrey to quiet down as she dashes to the empty chair at the table beside me with her bowl and spoon. I raise my eyebrows at the boys. “So, how about it? You still need to talk about this privately? Because it really is okay if you do.”

There’s a brief moment where Evan and Owen do seem to discuss things, only without words. Then they both look down at the table shyly but in Audrey’s direction.

Owen speaks up first. “You sure it wouldn’t be…”

“Uh… you know… too weird?” finishes Evan.

Audrey smiles widely. “NO!” she tells them. “I think it would be really COOL! I would love to be able to see it!” They finally lift their eyes to meet her gaze. “Please, please, PLEASE, can I be there if you do?”

The twins glance at one another again, but this time with small grins while blushing. “Okay,” they mumble in unison, drawing a happy squeak from Audrey.

And a big smile from me! “That’s great to hear, boys,” I tell them. “When are you thinking you want to give it a try?” I figure they’ll have to work up to it.

But apparently, the Thompsons are a “just do it” kind of family. Their grins widen, and they jump from the table, exposing their cocks to Audrey and me. If their hardness had flagged at any time after they sat down, there is no evidence of it now. Clearly, these boys are completely turned on by the idea of experimenting together and had only been holding themselves back all this time because of their fear of scorn from everyone else, and perhaps even from each other. Without that burden now, they are keyed up to go. “What should we do?” they ask, almost shaking with excitement as they eye each other up and down.

Since neither of them answer each other, I’ll assume the question was intended for me to help them. “Go to your bedroom, guys, and just start feeling and touching each other. Do what feels good.” They giggle and run to the larger bedroom with the tidy made-up beds. I direct my attention to Audrey, who is already on her feet. “Grab the coconut oil we used last night and bring it into them. They may need it. I’m getting my camera bag from our room.”

We dash about to retrieve our items, and then I follow Audrey into the twins’ room. We find the boys on their knees on one of the beds, facing one another, each one with his left hand on his brother’s hip and his right hand already busy carefully exploring his brother’s stiff penis. They’re not wasting time!

“Your hand feels… just like mine,” one of the boys breathes as he watches his cock being fondled. The lack of a birthmark on his groin tells me it’s Owen.

Evan is also staring down, his jaw slack. “Yours too,” he mutters. “But not knowing… exactly how you’re gonna touch it…”

“… makes it feel even better,” Owen moans quietly.

I have my camera raised to my face now. “Is it okay if I take pictures, like yesterday?” I ask them gently. They turn briefly to me, full of trust, and as expected from these little exhibitionists, they smirk and nod. I begin snapping away rapidly as they concentrate on each other again. I feel and hear Audrey beside me, maneuvering to see all she can see.

Evan drops a bit of spit onto his cock and Owen’s thumb, Owen follows suit, and they start handling their respective shafts a bit harder. Without a word, Audrey leans forward and presents the can of oil to them. The boys pause for an instant, then they both tentatively dip their fingertips in and go back to grasping their brothers with more lubrication, pulling themselves a little closer as their hands begin stroking in earnest. They get into matched rhythms, beginning to pant with their foreheads resting together and their hips and wrists thrusting faster and harder. It hasn’t even been a couple of minutes, and they are both wanking hard and breathing heavier. I suspect that this first experience isn’t going to last long.

But then they both stop, seemingly on the same page that they don’t want to finish quite like this.

“Sure you wanna do this?” Owen gasps.

“Yeah!” Evan rasps in reply.

They gesture back to Audrey for the oil. Then they mildly surprise me when they bend over and spread their knees, hurriedly reaching behind themselves and starting to push greased-up fingers into their own rectums the same way I had done for them last night. They’re going to fuck each other already? Well, they’re quick studies, I’ll give them that! I snap a bunch of photos while they work on their task. They have their holes relaxed and lubed in no time while their cocks remain erect and ready.

“Who’s up first?” asks Evan. Then, without hesitation, they launch into a rapid-fire game of “rock paper scissors”, matching their throws at least six times before Evan’s paper finally covers Owen’s rock. The whole decision-making process is done in a matter of seconds. Evan grins in victory. “I’ll start behind you, then?”

“Okay!” replies Owen with apparently no hard feelings at all, getting on his hands and knees and presenting his ass to his brother like they did to me. Evan positions himself on his knees behind Owen on the bed. Audrey is leaning in on one side of the boys while I frame the action on my camera screen from the other side. We watch as a shaking Evan presses the tip of his cock to Owen’s partially-open asshole.

“Ready, Dude?” Evan asks with nervous excitement in his voice.

Owen sounds equally excited. “Yeah, do it, Dude!”

Evan grips Owen’s hips firmly, and then all three kids make aroused noises as Evan’s preteen penis is swallowed shockingly quickly and smoothly by his brother’s ass. Evan holds himself still for a moment but quickly pumps in and out with accelerating speed. The twins are both grunting in time with the clapping of Evan’s pelvis against Owen’s butt. Damn, this is hot!

“This is SO hot!” murmurs Audrey. Horny minds think alike, I guess. I continue to snap photos.

The boys have only been at it for perhaps thirty seconds when Evan stops, panting hard. “Dude, I’m too close! Wanna switch?”

“Fuck yeah!” is Owen’s enthusiastic reply. Evan pulls out and turns around, dropping to his hands while Owen scrambles to assume his new position. Again, they both moan out with intense pleasure as one boy penetrates his sibling’s anus. Owen immediately starts thrusting. “Holy shit, Dude… you’re so… tight!” he mutters between grunts of exertion. Evan just moans in response.

I’m getting pretty aroused as I crawl down to the floor to try to get a new angle between Owen’s legs, hoping for some shots of his balls slapping against Evan’s. But before I can get the camera up to my eye, Owen has also stopped short. “Shit, I’m close to cumming, too! Switch places again!” With that, he pulls out and waits for Evan to straighten up.

I realize that the boys have only ever experienced doing it doggie-style as Owen starts to turn around to assume the position again. “Wait,” I interject. “Owen, just lay back and pull your knees up and wide.” Owen doesn’t hesitate to flip over, landing on his back, and in a moment, he is wide open for Evan, peering wildly up at his brother past his straining erection. “And now… just go for it,” I instruct Evan, pointing him to his target.

Evan scoots up to Owen as fast as he can and positions the glans of his member into the distended opening, letting out a shuddering groan as he fills his twin’s hole again. This time there is no hesitation. Evan starts fucking Owen hard immediately, driving himself into Owen with repeated loud claps of skin on skin, accompanied by moans of young adolescent pleasure and incoherent curses from Evan. The way they are looking at one another now is going to make the photos I’m taking even better than the ones a minute ago.

Once more, Evan is at the precipice but is unwilling for it to end just yet. “Your turn again!” he cries as he pulls out again and falls back onto the mattress behind him. Audrey is vigorously rubbing away on her clit as Owen climbs quickly between Evan’s legs. I capture the moment perfectly with my camera as Owen thrusts deep back into Evan, letting his torso fall lower and hover over his brother. The intimacy between them is palpable.

And then, Owen really goes for it, fucking Evan’s ass for all he’s worth. Both boys’ lewd noises are louder and more intense than ever now. It’s pretty obvious neither of them can last much longer. I really wish I was recording the audio, but great erotic pics will have to do.

It’s again only a matter of a dozen or so seconds before their gasps get deeper and harder, signaling the approach of the point of no return. Only this time, it appears Owen has no interest in holding back as Evan did moments ago. Owen lunges forward over and over as hard as he can, grunting louder and higher, then quivers and whimpers through what looks like an absolutely tremendous orgasm. I record a look of complete bliss that explodes onto his face as he starts gasping desperately for sufficient air in his lungs.

“Oh shit, oh shit, oh shit! Dude, c’mon!” mutters Evan tightly, trembling in arousal with Owen’s cock still twitching in his butt. Owen continues struggling for breath, for a moment not acknowledging his twin. Evan is desperate now, as well. “DUDE! OWEN!” he cries louder. “I’m gonna blow! We gotta switch again NOW!”

“Sorry!” Owen gasps. He sags backward, his cock popping out with a squelch, followed by his back hitting the mattress. His rock-hard rod bounces off his stomach and produces one last glob of semen, which runs down the length of his cock to his crotch. In a frenzy, Evan leaps up and pins Owen’s legs open by the back of his knees. He buries himself heavily into Owen’s ass, wincing urgently. He takes just four hard and fast thrusts, accompanied by a loud, high-pitched cry with each thrust, and then he falls forward into his brother’s arms, yelling out in ecstasy as his huge orgasm overtakes him. I zoom in with my camera lens from behind them. It is incredible to watch incestuous cum leaking out of Evan’s butthole and running down over his hairless ballsack. Not to mention watching those cute balls jump a little with each shot of semen he fires into his brother’s bowels. This is so fucking sexy, and I’m overjoyed to be here to witness this.

When the height of Evan’s cum has passed, he pulls his cock free from Owen and collapses in exhaustion to the bed beside his equally tired twin. Facing one another, their arms and legs wrap around each other’s bodies naturally. As they share a close embrace while panting for breath, they find themselves nose to nose, staring directly into one another’s eyes. I cannot believe my luck as I press the shutter on my camera at the exact moment that their eyes flutter closed and their lips touch, their first kiss since they were probably toddlers. One light kiss is followed by another, and then more kisses that are much deeper and more passionate. Between photos, I glance up at Audrey, and I chuckle at the look of wonder and happiness on her face. She might as well have hearts for pupils in her eyes. She’s so delighted.

Finally, after an intense tongue-lashing session that probably lasts longer than their lovemaking, the twins gently back off. Again, they share a deep gaze that seems to convey more to each other than words could. I snap a final photo of this intimate embrace, then motion to Audrey that we should back off.

I don’t know if they intend Audrey and me to hear it, but we do regardless. “Love you, Dude,” they both murmur quietly. Audrey makes a tiny “aw” sound while I smile at the cuteness. It is adorable. I’m pretty sure I get what the boys are feeling. I don’t think they’ve “fallen in love” with each other, but rather they’ve deepened their existing tight bond to a whole new level. No matter who they meet in life, boys or girls, men or women, these two will always have a unique connection to each other that will live on, no matter what. They just love each other! No other statement can describe how they feel. That’s awesome! I’ve never really been “into” incest as a kink, but now I can see why so many are drawn to it.

Audrey and I leave them to snuggle for a bit while we return to the kitchen. Her cereal is a soggy mush by now, so she dumps it out and prepares a fresh bowl. I flip through a sampling of the camera’s images, thrilled at the pictures on the small screen. They’re even better than I thought! I pull out the memory card and bring my laptop to the kitchen table so that I can back up the files before anything can happen to them.

By the time Audrey finishes off her breakfast, and my file transfers are complete, the twins emerge, somehow looking at once both embarrassed and proud of themselves. “You two were INCREDIBLE!” says Audrey. “Thanks for letting me watch!”

The boys blush again. “You’re welcome, I guess,” mumbles one of them with a cute smirk. I glance down at his semi-chubbed cock. Birthmark. Evan. Jeez, I need to hang name tags around their necks.

Owen is also a bit bashful now that his hormones have calmed down. “Glad you… enjoyed the show?”

Audrey most certainly did enjoy it. “It was so beautiful! And HOT! I almost had a cum just watching!” This comment does nothing to reduce the color of the boys’ cheeks.

My little girl then leans forward and lowers her voice. “So… what’s it feel like to do, you know… bum stuff?” she asks scandalously. She’s funny, acting like she’s being all confidential, but I’m the only other person around, and I’m sitting at the same table not three feet away. She could yell at the top of her lungs, and the amount of privacy in her question wouldn’t change.

The twins exchange shy grins. “It feels, I don’t know… pretty nice, I guess?” Owen answers.

“Yeah,” adds Evan. “I mean, it feels a little weird at first. Like, having a great big shit, but in reverse. If that makes sense?”

The boys are getting less embarrassed by the second. “But like, there’s a spot in there that feels all buzzy when it’s rubbed in and out.” Owen turns to Evan. “You know?” he asks.

“Oh, yeah, for sure!” exclaims Evan. “Up in here, right?” as he presses his finger up underneath his ballsack.

Owen nods and pokes his finger to the same spot. “Right, exactly! I almost came last night just from that. Audrey hardly had to touch my cock at all!” Evan nods enthusiastically in agreement. I feel my ego gets inflated a little more at this testimony. My dick also grows a little more, if I’m honest.

Audrey interrupts at the mention of my name. “What was the difference between how Scott’s… thingy… felt in your bum, compared to yours? I mean…” she smiles apologetically, “… he IS bigger down there than either of you. Did it, you know… hurt? Compared to with each other?”

The twins shoot a questioning look at me. I spread my hands in invitation. “It’s all right, guys. Please, everyone! Be honest and open here with each other. We should all tell the truth about what we like, what we want, and what we DON’T want. If not, that’s when someone gets hurt.”

Both of them smile in understanding and turn their attention back to Audrey and each other. “So yeah… his cock is longer, for sure. I felt it way further inside than yours,” Owen tells Evan.

“For sure,” Evan repeats. “But I don’t think that’s what hurt, though.”

“No,” agrees Owen. “But what DID hurt was-”

“- how THICK his cock is!” both of them say in unison, reverently nodding together with a glance towards my robe-covered groin.

I roll my eyes, thinking about how these kids are impressed with my average-at-best six-inch cock, and I feel the need to inform them that I am not hung like the proverbial horse. “Just so you know, my dick is pretty normal for an adult, both in length and thickness. I’m nothing special.”

“Yeah, but compared to us, you’re HUGE!” says Evan.

“And you stretched us pretty wide last night!” adds Owen. “I wasn’t sure at first if I could take it.”

“Me neither,” inserts Evan. “Even after the fingers… that was pretty uncomfortable at first.”

“Really?” Audrey asks, worried and almost upset. “It HURT that bad?”

There’s another quick glance between the twins for verification and a pause as they look for the right words. Evan tries first. “It hurt, yeah, but…”

“… kinda in a GOOD way, you know?” Owen offers.

“Yeah,” agrees Evan. “Same as when you scratch an itch. Only… different!” He smiles lopsidedly.

“And by the end, way better!” chimes in Owen.

“WAY better!” agrees Evan.

This is all interesting, and Audrey is very curious, but time is slipping by. I clear my throat and look at the twins. “You know, guys, I don’t mind if we all have some more fun before we get back to work this afternoon. But if you two want to play, we have to follow some hygiene rules. I know you had fun, but you just finished cumming up in each other’s butts, and that means you’ve got a mix of at least a couple of kinds of fluids on you that should be cleaned up. You need to shower. Thoroughly!” I chuckle at the sheepish grins that they share. “Go on, give each other a good scrub, as clean as you can. Inside and out. Audrey and I will figure out what we’re doing for the rest of the morning.”

After the boys have hustled into the bathroom, I start picking up dishes and carrying them over to the sink. Audrey is sitting at the table, looking pensive. Beautiful and stark naked, but pensive. “What’re you thinking about, Lil’ Bit?” I say to her. As much as I desire her perfect little body and want her to feel every pleasure her body can give her, I’m also the closest thing to a parent she has. I want her to talk to me. “I probably should have asked you first. Are you okay with some more exploration this morning, like I suggested to the boys?”

“Oh yeah!” she replies without hesitation. “Definitely! I’m just…” she bites her lower lip, “… I’m just wondering about what we should try to do next.”

I sit down in the chair next to her. “Is there something you want to try?” I ask though I suspect I already know what’s on her mind.

She fidgets a little, psyching herself up. “I think I want you… and me… to try bum stuff. Like Evan and Owen did, and like you did with them last night.” She lifts her chin and thrusts out her small breasts, attempting to look either brave or seductive. I’m not sure which. Either way, I love it. She takes a deep breath and looks at me squarely through narrowed eyelids. “I want you to fuck my ass, Scott!” she purrs, trying to sound serious and mature. But she can’t quite pull it off, and she breaks down giggling and belatedly covers her mouth because of her cursing, causing me to laugh as well. After the moment of levity, she pulls herself together and looks up at me earnestly. “But honest, I really do want to try it. So… can we?”

How can I refuse an invitation like that, especially given all the sexy stuff she and the boys have been talking about and doing this morning? I growl playfully and pounce at her, grabbing her easily around her waist and under her ass and then sweeping her up over my shoulder like a sack of potatoes. She squeals joyfully as I also snatch up the can of coconut oil from the counter and quickly haul her off to our bedroom. I make an obnoxious belly laugh of victory and drop her to the mattress, where I get to admire her body bounce in front of me before she relaxes on her back, spreading her legs wide for me. I was already worked up by the morning’s activities around me, but roughhousing with my naked Lil’ Bit has my Johnson and me at full attention. I smirk down at her as I loosen the knot and pull open my robe, dropping it on the floor and showing her the evidence of how much she has turned me on.

Nevertheless, we both know I’m not going to just jump on her and force my cock into her ass, just like that. As I did with the boys, I’m going to work at her rear hole with the oil and my fingers first so that this can happen as pleasurably as possible. I sit on the edge of the bed below her, dipping my middle finger into the can of oil, and smiling supportively at her. “Okay, you saw what I did with Owen and Evan last night. Your turn, now.” She pulls her knees up and to the sides with no further prompting, exposing her butthole to me.

But then, with an ease that can only come from her gymnastics experience, Audrey casually hooks her elbows under her knees and pulls her legs up further, opening her up to me even more! Holy shit! She titters with delight at the way I’m open-mouthed at this display of lewd flexibility. “Is this good?” she asks with sweet innocence. I can only nod in awe of the wonderous view in front of me. Not just her puckered backdoor, but that beautiful pussy above it, which is splayed wide open, just for me. My mouth is watering for another taste, and my cock aches to nestle inside her wet velvet sleeve again.

First things first, though, I have work to do here. So I scootch up closer to her butt, hovering my head above her body so I can see both her face and my target, and I press my oily finger to her tight brown eye. Despite how wide she has spread open her crotch and how her pussy is gaping, her asshole is tightly closed. I talk to her gently, my feigned caveman-act forgotten for now. “Alright, now you remember how I told Evan and Owen to ‘push’, as if you need to poop?” Audrey nods. “Do that for me now, okay?”

I feel her sphincter open a bit, enough that I can insert just the tip of my finger into the orifice. Audrey gasps at the intrusion, and the ring of muscle clamps back around my finger tightly. “It’s okay, just relax,” I tell her soothingly. Her breathing quickly returns to normal. “Now, try pushing again.” She gently flexes her abdomen, and slowly the pressure on my finger is released. “That’s good. Now … I’m going to push in a little deeper, okay?” Audrey bites her lower lip again and nods. With that, I push my finger, sinking it in slowly but smoothly, penetrating as far as the knuckles of my other fingers will allow. The strong muscle ring grips briefly again, but Audrey learns to open it up. “All right, that’s good, my finger is in as far as it can go. Now I’m going to move it in and out. You ready?”

“Yeah!” she whispers.

With great care, I start pumping her butthole with my finger. As a female of the species, she lacks a prostate, and as such, she can’t experience the wonder of having that gland massaged within her anus. I’ve heard of a mythical “A-spot” that girls are supposed to have, though, and I make an effort to find it. Audrey’s breathing is deep but steady as I gradually explore the inside of her ass. Although the tunnel within is spacious enough, her sphincter continues to be quite tight. It’s looser than a few minutes ago when I started, but not relaxing as much as either of the twins yesterday. “Are you okay? Does it feel good?” I ask her.

“I… think so…” she replies haltingly.

I decide she needs more lube: my finger has spread out all of its oil and needs a refresh. “I’m going to dip my finger in the can again,” I tell her while continuing to pump in and out. “When I push back in, it should be easier this time.”

“O- okay!” Audrey says to me. I can’t tell if she’s really enjoying this yet, but I’ll continue for now.

In a swift motion, I pull my finger out, re-lube with a liberal dollop of oil, then press back in. I’m concerned at how quickly her ring mostly closed back up, requiring me to begin work at loosening it again. I was thinking of adding my index finger soon, but clearly, that’s not happening yet. I don’t think she’s trying to resist. She’s just got a really tight hole. And it’s going to take a lot of time and attention to stretch it out enough to accommodate my cock, that’s for certain.

Maybe she needs a more pleasant distraction to help her with her stretching, I think to myself. And I believe I know just the thing!

Without changing the steady rhythm of my pistoning finger, I back away a bit lower down the bed, turning and sliding my knees down to the floor. Audrey cranes her neck, looking down, wondering what I’m doing. “I’m going to help you out, okay?” I reassure her with a smile. Now, as I bend forward at the waist, my face falls perfectly into her nether regions between her legs, just as I had hoped. I can keep up the stimulation of her butt just below my chin, while my lips and tongue can be used for… other things! Such as licking up the juices that are currently building up in her lovely pussy.

Audrey sucks in a breath, and her head falls back to the mattress as my tongue goes to work. I’ve loved everything about eating her out the few times I’ve done this to her before, but her taste this morning is absolutely exquisite! I lap up every drop of her nectar, probing my tongue deep down into her pussy, hungrily slurping away. Then I travel a little higher, kissing and nibbling and licking that perfect little clit that is being presented for me so invitingly. My finger and my mouth work together so that her anal and clitoral stimulation is synchronized, and I smile to myself as I can feel the rocking of her body and hear her groans amplify to the same rhythm. I also notice that my efforts down below seem to be working, as her butt’s grip on the knuckles of my middle finger is slackening. Not a lot yet, but it’s noticeable.

Then I hear movement in the doorway behind me. And the joint exclamations of “Holy shit!” from two preteen boys.

I grin and turn to look behind me. Fresh from the shower and not having bothered to dry themselves off, Evan and Owen are dripping wet and standing naked there side-by-side, staring with mouths agape at how Audrey has folded herself up to offer her pussy and ass to me. Whether it is as a result of their activities in the shower or Audrey’s sexy contortions, or perhaps both, their young cocks are back to full attention again. I suppose that’s no surprise.

“Scott!” gasps Audrey, still staring at the ceiling. “Don’t stop! Please!”

“Just one sec, Lil’ Bit,” I reply calmly, causing her to groan in frustration. I very deliberately continue fingering her ass slowly as a quick plan formulates in my mind. “Owen,” I say to the birthmark-less boy still standing immobile behind me, “come on up here on this side,” motioning to the bed on Audrey’s left. “Evan, take the other side,” I tell his brother. Both boys hop up on the mattress to either side of Audrey and me, beside her upturned thighs, eager for direction. “Kneel down, guys,” I instruct. “Now, I’m working on her butthole with my finger, but I’m also using my mouth on her pussy to make her feel good. Why don’t you guys help her out with your mouths, too?” I smile and nod at Audrey’s flattened chest and her small little nipples that are proudly standing on either side. The twins smile broadly and immediately crawl up to Audrey’s chest on either side of her, latching on to her tiny tits with their mouths while I resume feasting on her clit.

Audrey makes a strangled noise of arousal, then starts panting urgently and loudly as we labor together on her. I work my mouth everywhere, down to her taint, deep into her warm tunnel, over her plump little lips, and back up to her clit. I love how delicate her hairless pussy is, how there’s nothing to get between me and her smooth private parts. Just perfect! Fuck, there is NOTHING like young pussy! I could eat this for three meals a day as long as I live!

It doesn’t take much longer for the twins and me to get her where we want her. Her panting soon turns into full-on wails of pleasure, her muscles seize, and my tongue and chin are rewarded with a renewed flow of delicious juices. She cums hard and long as the three of us continue to lavish attention to her erogenous zones. When she finally flops back limply, I give her pussy one last kiss and, breathing heavily, I pull my head up. “I think she’s had enough, guys,” I suggest wryly to the boys, and they reluctantly release their mouths from Audrey’s breasts and sit back up. Finally, I pull my tired middle finger from her anus with a quiet wet squelch.

Unhooking her legs from her elbows, Audrey lets her legs flop back down to either side of me. She’s exhausted, as limp as a rag doll as she breathes hard. She reaches up to the twins’ heads and pulls them both down to her face, giving each of them a warm kiss on the lips. “That was… amazing!… You guys… are GOOD at that!” she mutters. Again, the boys blush. God, that is so cute!

Audrey reaches a hand down between her legs to me, so I pull her up to a sitting position. Then she takes my head in both hands, pulls herself close, and kisses me deeply. Oh, fucking yes! I effortlessly pull her light body into my arms and return the kiss with vigor. She moans sexily as she gets a taste of her own juices from my face, and her tongue works in my mouth harder. She’s still all worked up, ready for more, and I’m more than willing to oblige. One of my hands grips her little butt cheeks firmly, and then the other is wrapped all the way around her back so that I’m fingering her nipple from the other side, holding her skinny torso securely to my chest and my flexing pelvis. My cock is a rod of steel, sawing back and forth under her pussy, as we try to inhale each other’s mouths. All of this morning’s crazy preteen sex has me unbelievably on edge. I am SO horny right now and only a hair’s breadth away from just pinning her back down on the mattress and impaling myself into that tight, wet snatch!

But only a split-second before I act on that impulse, Audrey breaks the kiss. “So! How’d I do?” she asks brightly, innocently unaware of just how close I am to ravaging her. “Are we gonna do butt-stuff now?”

Ahhhh… shit! I was trying to forget about that for a little while. But now that this particular subject is top of mind for Audrey, we have to deal with it.

I let out a small sigh, lessen the strength of my hold on her, and I sit down on the end of the bed, letting her kneel on my lap. “So yeah… through all that, your bum did relax, it did get easier for my finger to move in and out…” I look at her apologetically, “… but your butt is still very tight! A fair bit tighter than either Owen or Evan were last night, and I spent less time with each of them. It’s not your fault, but you’re not ready. I can’t do that with you. I WON’T do it, at least not yet. It would be very, very painful for you. I would almost certainly injure you!!”

She looks so crestfallen, compared to the enthusiasm she was showing just moments ago. “I’m sorry, Lil’ Bit!” I tell her, kissing her tenderly on the lips. I then hold her in my arms again, a warm, loving embrace, unlike the ultra-excited clutch of a minute ago. It’s funny how a loving hug can appear so similar to a lustful hug but feel so different. I’m still aroused as hell, my cock as hard as ever, but I’m not tempted to use this as an opportunity to fuck her anymore. Sometimes we need moments to just feel close.

Apparently, the twins feel the same way. They had both remained kneeling higher up on the bed as this was going on. But now, feeling sorry for Audrey, they have crawled to either side of us and have joined in to make it a group hug for Audrey. The boys really are nice, good kids! Horny kids, to be sure, but good kids. Audrey is still disappointed, but the boys are helping to lift her spirits. I feel her muscles relax, and she sighs in contentment with the feel of nude male bodies pressed against her from all sides. I also notice, with some amusement, that all three cocks attached to those bodies are poking her as well, and she seems to really like it. One bigger one at her front, and smaller ones to either side of her.

Smaller cocks? Hmmm…

I put a finger under Audrey’s chin and lift it so that she’s looking at me. “Why did you want me to try anal with you?” I ask, smiling.

“I just… wanted to try it,” she replies simply. “It looked like fun.”

I smile a little wider. “No, I’m asking why you wanted ME to try anal with you?”

“Oh!” she says. “Well, you taught Owen and Evan how to do bum stuff. I thought you’d teach me too. You’ve taught me everything else about sex so far!”

“I didn’t teach you everything about sex. At least not for your first time. Remember, you did it with both of the twins yesterday before you did it with me.”

“Okay,” says Audrey carefully, looking like she’s understanding where I’m going. I glance at the boys, who are staring at me in a most interesting way.

“How’s this for an idea?” I ask expansively. “Evan and Owen’s cocks are the perfect size to try anal with you. And since they are now experienced in performing it from both ends, I’m sure either one would be a great partner for you to try it with.” I look at the boys back and forth. “How about you boys? Would you be okay with this if Audrey wants to?”

“FUCK, yeah!” comes the instant stereo reply. I snort softly at their obvious response.

I pull my arms free from around Audrey’s body and wrap them around the boys, below their tight butts, and I squeeze all three of them together. “What do you say, Lil’ Bit? I’ll still be here to help.”

Audrey is looking down, examining their erect penises that are at proud attention between her stomach and mine, sizing them up. She pulls one of her hands out from behind my back and proceeds to idly caress one adolescent cock, then the other, drawing aroused hisses from the owner of each. “I was kinda wanting it to be you,” she mumbles to me, taking the opportunity to also fondle the third erect dick within her reach. I hum quietly and smile. “But I get it. You don’t want to hurt me. I love you for that.” She pulls her other arm free and returns to grasping preteen penises, one per hand, much to the boys’ pleasure.

Finally, she smiles. “Okay. I’ll do it!” she agrees. Then her smile fades a little. “But… which one of you?” she asks, looking back and forth uncertainly between the twins’ faces. Clearly, she doesn’t want there to be any bruised feelings.

There’s a brief pause as the twins do their ESP communication thing with each other. Seriously, scientists need to study these two to determine how they are doing it! Then, a moment later, the boy on my left (who turns out to be Evan) speaks up. “Owen really should be the one,” he says to Audrey graciously. “Me and you did it first yesterday, and then I also did it first with Owen this morning.” He grins goofily at his brother. “It’s your turn to be first, Dude!”

“Thanks, Dude,” Owen replies with an identical goofy grin. He looks to Audrey. “Is that okay?” he asks politely.

“Yeah!” she replies sweetly, hugging them both. “I love the way you guys work things out together. You guys are awesome!”

The twins hug her back, and I take the opportunity to hug them all. Hey, naked twelve-year-olds are hugging on my lap. I’m not going to pass up the chance to join them!

Then I hear Owen clear his throat. “Soooo… are we doing this…” he looks at Audrey hopefully, “… NOW?”

I laugh out loud at his directness, and the kids also giggle. You’ve got to love boys, always thinking with their pricks.

But actually, I have the beginnings of another plan forming in my head. “Can I make a suggestion?” I ask Owen and Audrey. “I’m thinking of something that could be a lot more fun and exciting than just plain ‘doing it’ here in the cabin or even out on the beach. Something,” I add, nodding to Evan, “that doesn’t leave anyone out. Something that I think will make everyone very, very happy, including myself!” I raise my eyebrows and look from face to face. “You with me?”

All three kids agree emphatically. “Great! I think you’re all going to love what I’m dreaming up right now. Let me get up.” Audrey and the twins scramble off of me and the bed, and I get to my feet. “I’m thinking of doing this as a proper photoshoot, one of the nude photo stories we’ve made before for Pyntar. But this will be a private shoot, just for the four of us! No one else ever sees this series of pictures.”

Audrey and Owen smile widely, eager to help me create something special that is only for ourselves. Evan is smiling as well, but half raises his hand. “Um, we were just wondering, what with all the pictures… I mean, they’re cool and all, we like being in them and seeing them after, but…” He and his brother exchange a look.

“… but do you ever think about shooting VIDEO instead?” finishes Owen. “Cause that’d be REALLY cool!” Audrey raises her eyebrows, clearly interested.

I incline my head. “I suppose it’s possible since my cameras can record hi-def video clips. But they’re really not designed for it as much as they are for stills, not like an actual video camera. And honestly, I’m just not a videographer. I’m a traditional photographer. It’s what I enjoy, and it’s what I’m good at.”

The kids make remarkably similar expressions of disappointed acceptance. Ahhh, nuts! Maybe I am too stuck in my ways. “That said,” I concede, “I might try to remember to shoot some video if you guys really want.” The kids’ faces beam with my change of heart.

“Regardless, I’m going to need to get my cameras ready with fresh batteries and empty memory cards, both my primary and backup, just in case. I also have to make a quick trip out to scout the locations I’m thinking of, to see what the light is and where the shadows are,” I tell them as I gather my equipment. Then I gesture to Audrey. “While I’m doing all that, you should take a shower and clean up. You look beautiful, but you also look like you just finished having sex, which isn’t far from the truth!” Audrey giggles again while I turn to the twins. “And you two, please comb out your hair and brush your teeth, make yourselves look like you’re going out. Then you’ll need sexy bathing suits. I know you brought matching Speedos. They’ll be perfect.” Back to Audrey. “And I’d love to see you wearing that little white bikini we bought. None of you have to put them on just yet, but have them ready. Also, you’ll all need all the normal beach stuff. Towels, sunscreen, a beach ball, stuff like that. I want to take some extraordinary pictures, and I need your help to make it all happen as best as we can! Okay?”

“Okay, Mister H!” reply the twins, heading to their bags in the other bedroom.

“Please don’t be too long!” calls out Audrey as she dashes for the bathroom.

I go about getting ready as quickly as I can, checking the battery levels and available file storage for my primary camera. Then I repeat the process with my backup, as I want to be ready in case my main rig breaks. Next is the location check, so I pull on my board shorts. My cock has been mostly erect all morning, so I’ve got a pretty obvious bulge in front, but that can’t be helped right now as I slip on my sandals and head out the door into the bright light for the first time today. It’s past 10am, and the temperature is already quite warm. Out on the beach, the conditions are perfect: a steady wind and a mix of brilliant sunshine and clouds make for spectacular outdoor photographs in natural conditions. There are a number of other tourists swimming in the ocean or relaxing on the beach, but they are all a hundred meters or more away, so we will be able to safely ignore them while using this area.

Lastly, I need to check that our secret beach through the ferns and trees is actually still our secret. Thankfully, I find it just as empty today as it was yesterday. I decide on the exact spot in the sand where I want this morning’s photo sequence to conclude, looking for the location with the right ocean background, angle to the trees, and predicting what will be the perfect combination of sunlight and shade once the sun moves a little further overhead. As I think about what is going to happen here shortly, my semi-chubbed dick grows back to full attention. God damn, the kids have got me horny! I turn to head back, hoping that this will be as good as I imagine it.

Re-entering the cabin, I see the kids have been busy with their tasks. They are still as naked as ever, but their very skimpy bathing suits are laid out on the table by the door, and the beach supplies are stuffed in a bag. The boys have done an excellent job of making themselves ready. With their long, sun-bleached hair having been nicely combed around their photogenic faces, they look exceptionally handsome. Matched to their fit young bodies, all-over bronzed skin, and ever-prominent erect dicks, it seems so unfair to all the rest of the boys their age that these two have managed to monopolize so much of the available boy sex appeal for themselves. And then there’s Audrey, fresh from the shower, blow-drying and brushing her thick, dark hair, which stands out in contrast to her lightly tanned skin. I am struck by how incredible she looks. With her perky not-yet-mature figure and her very cute face, she is simply gorgeous! These kids are the very definition of young beauty and forbidden sexuality. And then to also know that these three all happen to be kind-hearted, hard-working, and funny kids. On top of that, it really drives home to me how lucky I am to be able to help guide this adventure of discovery for them.

“Are you finished getting ready?” Audrey complains with a grin. “We’re all set here!”

“Not quite,” I tell her. “First, if you’re going to try anal with Owen, you’re going to need the oil again to help him slide in. We’re going to put a fair amount up your bum now so that you’ll be ready and slick when the time comes.”

“Is this how I can help?” Evan pipes in eagerly. “I mean, I can help with that… if you want!”

Poor Evan, I haven’t told him what his role here is yet. “Actually, no,” I reply. “Audrey and I can handle it. But you and Owen have a much more fun task before we’re ready to go.”

“What’s that?” the twins inquire.

I smirk and nod towards their straining members. “For this special photoshoot, I want you boys to start off not looking quite so, shall we say… ‘excited’. Also, I think you’re both going to need some staying power later on. So…” my smile widens as I make a jerking motion with my fist, “… go ahead! Have at it!” They blush again as they comprehend their job.

“Ooooo! Can I watch again?” Audrey cries excitedly. “Scott, you can help me with the oil while we watch, can’t you?” She spins back to the twins. “I wanna see you cum again! I love it when you do that!”

Evan and Owen look to me to verify if this fits my mysterious plan. I shrug. “Works for me. I figure you’ll probably get the job done even faster if you have an audience,” I say with a wink. “Let’s all go back into the boys’ room for this.”

After we all scurry into the room with the two double beds, the twins sit down right beside each other on the edge of one bed, facing the second bed. “I’m going to watch on my hands and knees,” proclaims Audrey, and she proceeds to offer her butt to me behind her. Each of the boys is already caressing themselves slowly.

I settle onto the second bed with Audrey, grudgingly aware that I’m back to being the only one even partially dressed in this cabin again with sexy shit going on. I scoop up a finger-full of oil from the can, examining her asshole. It’s completely closed up, which is good as she’s not going to ‘leak’ once we get a lot of lubrication up there. I put my other hand on one of her cheeks gently. “Can you try to push now, Lil’ Bit?” I ask her, and I’m rewarded by her hole quickly opening up. Again, not all that wide, but enough for now. I press my slick digit in, and Audrey makes a tiny moan. “Now, let it close around my finger,” I instruct, and I feel her sphincter tighten. Then I pull out, allowing her ring of muscle to squeeze much of the oil off and keep it inside. “Good,” I tell her. “We’re going to do that a few more times to make sure you’re ready.” I carefully repeat the process several times until I feel that her rectum is nice and slick. As long as she can open the muscle ring enough for Owen’s cock, everything should go smoothly. For now, her hole has closed back up again.

Meanwhile, the boys have been trying to watch this action instead of taking their matters into their own hands, so to speak. I recall them saying they like to take their time when they masturbate. Well, boys, the clock is running, it’s time to milk those snakes, and I know how to expedite things.

“Audrey?” I murmur craftily. “Would you say Owen and Evan are holding us up here?”

“I was kinda thinking the same thing!” she replies, grinning at the boys. They smile back nervously.

I give her a pat on her ass. “You think you know how to speed things up?”

Audrey tries to make her voice sound sultry. “I think sooooo!” she purrs. With that, she crawls forward off the bed we’re on and kneels on the floor between the beds. She’s directly in front of the twins, who are looking slack-jawed down at her, hands still loosely draped over their hard shafts. She reaches in and deftly replaces each of their hands with her own and begins lightly pumping them. The boys’ breathing quickens as her small palms rub up and down over the boys’ exposed glans. “Hmmm… needs some lube, I think,” she mutters suavely.

I reach behind me to the can of coconut oil. “Here you go,” I say, holding it behind Audrey’s head.

But she doesn’t even turn around. “No thanks!” she growls, her gaze locked on the boy to her right, shifting her look from his face to his cock and back again. The base of his cock tells me it’s Owen. Then, without releasing either penis from her grip, she shuffles between Owen’s knees, locks eyes with the boy, says, “I think this’ll make it wet enough,” and lowers her mouth over his dick.

I know this isn’t her first time giving a blow job. She did this once for the boys yesterday, and she has managed (with some difficulty) to take me in her mouth a few times before that. But right now, I’m amazed at how much of a pro she looks to be! Owen’s size seems to be just right for her sweet mouth as she bobs up and down, using lots of tongue and spit, and using her hand to twist up and down on the base with each withdrawal. Owen’s head has fallen back, and he’s making a loud groan. She is going to be a very talented cocksucker!

Before Owen can get any closer, Audrey pulls off him with a loud smack, backing away and crawling over to kneel between Evan’s legs. With no preliminaries, she dives down onto his identical cock, and proceeds to suck on it in an identical manner. Her right hand continues to pump and twist along the spit-covered entirety of Owen’s length, while her mouth and left hand now service Evan’s. Damn, she’s good! The noise Evan makes suggests he agrees.

Audrey pulls off, looking to switch again, but then she just backs up on her knees and glares up at their faces. “Stand up!” she orders the twins, her small breasts heaving. They obey, and she grunts, pulling the boys by their peters so that they are tight to one another hip-to-hip, slightly facing each other, their cocks now in very close proximity and directly in front of Audrey’s face. The twins put an arm around each other’s backs to hold themselves steady, then rest their other hands on top of and behind Audrey’s head. She sighs in satisfaction as she tries to swallow Owen whole, almost managing to bury her nose into where his sparse pubes used to be and causing him to cry out softly. She blows him for a minute or so while jacking his brother, then switches swiftly to Evan to repeat the performance in reverse.

“I’m… getting kinda… close!” stammers Evan after Audrey has worked on him with her mouth for another minute.

She switches back to Owen in a flash, her head bobbing even faster now. “Uggggnnnn… me… me too!” gasps Owen after only a few seconds.

Audrey backs off Owen and pulls on their cocks even more than before, causing the boys to make startling noises of arousal. “Get even closer!” she barks at them. “I wanna try something!” The twins get almost chest to chest with their bodies, their pelvises thrust out, Audrey pressing their dicks directly together shaft-on-shaft and pointing in her direction. Then, without any further warning, she opens wide and stuffs both cocks into her mouth while wrapping her arms securely around each of their asses to hold them there! Shit, do I wish I had thought to bring in my camera! It’s too bad because I’m not missing a second of this to go get it!

Although I’m sure it’s awkward to thrust when your dick is pointed to one side and basically glued to your sibling’s dick, the twins manage the feat just fine. Guiding Audrey’s head with their hands and moving their hips in a coordinated action, Evan and Owen begin face-fucking Audrey with urgency. I can barely hear Audrey’s moans and the wet slurping of her sucking mouth over the twins’ pubescent groans rising rapidly in pitch and volume.

Barely thirty seconds go by before Owen climaxes, announced by a loud, high-pitched wince of ecstatic, almost painful exertion. Then, less than a second and exactly one additional pelvic thrust later, an identical noise erupts from Evan.

I suspect that one twelve-year-old boy’s ejaculation into a mouth, even if it’s the mouth of another twelve-year-old, would generally be a manageable event. But doubling the quantity of cum, and trying to deposit it all into a small mouth that is absolutely filled with two cocks, is a guaranteed recipe for a messy ending. Audrey valiantly tries to swallow the first double-barreled shots of sperm, but she immediately chokes on it. Gobs of runny white spooge fly back out her nostrils, and more sprays out of her mouth through the small gaps between her lips and the two twitching shafts. The boys thankfully let go of her head at this point, and she stumbles back a step, retching and sputtering. At the same time, the still-orgasming twins watch in helpless horror as their dicks continue to paint spurt after spurt of slimy semen onto Audrey’s face.

I see this, and part of me finds the image of Audrey splattered by the twins’ cum to be outrageously arousing. But then my protective side, the part that needs to make sure she’s all right, kicks into gear as I see she is struggling for breath. I leap off the bed towards her, easily lift her off the floor and hold her under her butt on one arm. “I got you, Lil’ Bit,” I tell her calmly, grabbing a face towel from the dresser with my other hand. I wipe gently but swiftly. “Spit out in the towel, and blow your nose,” I say, pressing the towel lightly into her lower face. A few undignified snorts, hocks, and coughs later, Audrey still has a bit of spunk to clear out of her nose and mouth but is obviously no longer in any danger of suffocating.

“Holy… shit! We’re… sorry!…” cries one of the boys, gasping for breath. He has apparently regained a portion of his brainpower after producing his half of that load.

His brother, also struggling to compose himself, is crowding up to Audrey and me from the other side and is equally remorseful. “Yeah… we’re really… sorry! Are… you okay?”

By now, Audrey is holding the towel to her nose and blowing wetly and loudly. After gulping a big lungful of air, she waves her arms. “I’m okay! Guys, I’m fine! It’s alright!” She swallows down most of the remnants of saliva and semen still in her mouth, resulting in a “blayh” noise and another small cough. She waves her arms again. “Scott, I can’t see! I think it’s in my eyes!” she cries out, actually choking off a laugh. I chuckle and find a dry corner of the towel and put it in her hands so that she can wipe at her eyelids. With vision restored, she motions for me to put her down. To her credit, Audrey isn’t upset with the boys at all as they hover near her. “Guys, it wasn’t your fault. It was mine! I…” she stifles a giggle, “… I wasn’t thinking about how that would end up!”

I’m impressed at how she’s handling this. Semen is still all over her cheeks and is dripping off her chin and nose. What an epic facial! But she took it like a champ!

I grin and put my hand on her back, steering her to the bathroom. “Let’s clean you up, okay?” I tell her. Once in front of the mirror, I’m amazed that I can find no sticky fluid at all in her hair. All she needs is a quick sponge-bath cleanup, mostly for her face, but also for the globs that fell to her torso and legs. I help her with that, plus I direct her to brush her teeth again. In no time, Audrey is back to her bubbly self and looking none the worse for wear, despite minutes ago looking more like a cheap cumslut.

Time is passing, and we have to get the show on the road. I’ve thoroughly enjoyed having the kids prancing around nude all morning, but it’s time to cover up. At least a little. “Alright, everyone, now that all that has been taken care of, we’re heading out to the beach in a minute. Time to put on your swimsuits!” Since I’m already in my shorts, I can afford to watch them ‘dress’.

Audrey starts pulling on her criminally tiny bikini. Starting with the top, it’s less of a bra and more like two little triangles of white fabric that barely conceal the tips of her breasts, connected by strings. Then she ties the knots on the thong bottoms, which covers the minimum amount of her pubic area, none of her ass at all, and they ride so low on her slender hips it’s amazing they stay up! The material isn’t sheer, but by the same token, it doesn’t completely obscure her little areolas or her beautiful camel toe. She might actually look sexier in this bikini than she looks naked!

Evan and Owen step into their suits, which encase the smallest part of their groins and asses. Fuck, they both look good in a Speedo! Combined with the way Audrey is dressed, I’m having trouble remembering my cock being harder than right now. For the boys, in contrast, there’s little sign of their packages, as their dicks are shriveled up and recovering from their second cum in barely half an hour. This is exactly what I want. But I’m counting on their young libidos to get them revved up again in short order.

At the moment, though, that’s not looking likely. The boys are still seeming to be a bit upset over how they and their wayward cocks might have treated Audrey disrespectfully. But she’s having none of it. “Guys, it’s okay! Really! As a matter of fact, it was… pretty HOT!” she confesses with a coquettish tilt of her head. “I LIKED having you squirt your stuff in my mouth and all over me!” She looks up at me with one of her little smirks, “I liked how naughty it felt!” She steps forward and pulls the twins into a big hug, one in each arm, then kisses them to prove that she holds no grudges. “So forget about it!” she exclaims. “I’m fine, you don’t have to worry!”

Owen (at least I think it’s Owen) beams happily. “Thanks, Dude!” he replies reflexively, followed by screwing up his face and rolling his eyes to the ceiling. “Why did I say ‘Dude’?” he repeats.

“Dude! She’s not a Dude!” his brother unhelpfully adds.

“Wait, why can’t I be a Dude?” cries Audrey.

“‘Cause Dudes are guys! Duh!” reply both the boys in unison and in complete agreement.

The other twin (presumably Evan) looks thoughtful. “But maybe she can be a… Dudette!” he suggests.

“Oooh!” his brother agrees excitedly. He turns to Audrey. “You wanna be a Dudette?”

“Okay!” she giggles. I think she’s just happy to have convinced the boys that she’s not hurt by what happened. And the boys appear very enthusiastic and relieved.

For my part, “relieved” isn’t a word I’d use for how I’m feeling at the moment as the kids continue their silly conversation. I’ve done nothing all morning but be up close and personal with three naked and incredibly sexy children, all of whom have helped one another get off (twice in the case of the twins). But I haven’t been able to! I’ve been erect this entire morning, and my balls are actually aching a bit. And now, we’re about to go outside and do a photoshoot that, if all goes according to the plan in my head, might just be about the most arousing thing I’ve ever photographed. I suppose I could spank it for a minute and blow my load, but for some reason, I want to keep this going, blue balls and all. I must have a streak of masochism in my personality.

“All right, let’s go,” I say, slinging my camera equipment over my shoulder. “Let’s get out there and do the best shoot we’ve ever done!” One of the boys grabs the bag of beach supplies, Audrey flings open the door, and we head out into the warm and breezy sunshine.

As we make our way out onto the sand, I explain only an outline of my simple plan for this photoshoot to the kids. Through photographs, we will tell the story of a girl who meets up with twin brothers who are playing on the beach. They will get to know each other and then sexually explore together. I will direct them on who is to do what, but I tell the kids to try to immerse themselves in the roles. I tell them that if they feel like Audrey is meeting up with Evan and Owen for the first time, can they imagine what it would feel like to be so comfortable and intimate together so quickly? Imagine the spark they could experience if only they had the freedom to just act on their feelings and not be held back by fear or uncertainty in such a situation? All three are excited to do this.

I get started with some establishing shots of Owen and Evan playing together. They had been clever to have included a football and volleyball in the beach bag, so I get the boys to pass the football back and forth. They naturally get into it, increasing the distance between them for the throws and running simple passing routes. Not surprisingly, the boys are athletic as hell for their age, and I get some great shots of their small but tight musculature and graceful movements on display.

Then I turn my attention to Audrey. Her medium-length hair is tied back in a ponytail, which looks great on her out in the sun. I have her stroll up the beach towards the twins, towel around her waist and sunscreen lotion in hand. By concealing the thong from view, the eye is drawn to the tiny top, precariously covering only a small part of the modest swells on her chest. Unprompted, she casts a glance at the boys that is friendly and inviting. I smile as I remind myself that she seems to have been born to do this.

The next step is to capture the kids ‘getting to know one ‘another’. We all agree that it will look and feel more realistic if the kids act the part, so Audrey and the boys introduce themselves as if they’re meeting for the first time. I snap away as they start talking. Their subtle flirting, the little smiles and eye contact, the glances at each other’s bodies are all perfect. As I had hoped, their actual genuine openness and comfort with each other is making the act very alluring.

One of the boys suggests they play volleyball, and the volleyball is brought out. I snicker at the over-the-top expressions on the faces of Evan and Owen when Audrey removes the towel around her waist, and her thong is revealed. As much as they like acting, I think that was a little much, but I’m sure they’ll all get a laugh out of the photos later. They make a show of an impromptu practice of bumping and setting the ball around, trying not to let it touch the sand. One of the twins dives for a ball and sprawls on the beach. Although it made for an excellent photo, I make the suggestion that they all attempt to avoid landing on the ground like that, as we don’t want to get sand into any of their suits. Sand doesn’t mix with what’s to come ‘later’. They all grin and agree, and then they return to their characters.

I direct Audrey to offer to help the twins out with her sunscreen. She gets the boys to lay face down side-by-side on the big beach blanket, spreading the lotion first on their shoulders and backs, then down the backs of their legs. After rubbing right up to the tight waistband and leg openings of the Speedos, she feigns embarrassment in lifting the edges of the stretchy fabric and running her finger just under the suit. The closeup shots of the boys’ faces, grinning at each other while having Audrey’s hands all over them, are priceless. After telling the twins to flip over, Audrey then works on their feet, up their thighs, and then their stomachs and chests. She is fast and energetic, a mood I manage to capture effectively. I grin to myself as I notice there’s now a bit more ‘definition’ to the fronts of the twins’ snug swimsuits. Lord knows what kind of an outline is being displayed by the front of my baggier shorts right now. I don’t need to look down to know that it’s prominent, to say the least.

Next, it’s Audrey’s turn to have her lotion applied, and she also starts out laying on her stomach. I intend to tell the boys to go at their task much more deliberately, but they’re already on the same page. In fact, I’m surprised to see that they actually seem to know what they’re doing as they start to massage Audrey slowly, one of the twins starting at her shoulders while the other works on her feet. I get them to tell us where they learned this as I frame and capture shot after shot of their hands stroking and prodding Audrey’s skin. They explain that their parents have always practiced massaging with each other and have given the twins massages since they were infants, longer than they can remember. It’s always made them feel nice, and for the last couple of years, their parents have, in turn, been teaching them. As they tell us this, Audrey’s breathing is becoming deeper with the twins’ hands converging at the center of her body, one pair of hands rubbing her lower back, the other pair on her upper thighs. She asks them, a bit breathlessly if they’ve done all this on their mom and dad. They confess that their parents have always draped towels over their privates, so there are places they haven’t touched, and with that, all four of their hands start kneading on her naked butt cheeks and between her legs just below her crotch. Audrey lets out a soft moan, and my cock pushes even harder against the constraints of my shorts.

Things get even hotter when they ask Audrey to turn over and lay on her back. The twins switch places, again starting at either end with her feet and face, and work toward the middle. The look of arousal on her face is fantastic as she experiences four immature but well-practiced hands stroking the outer perimeters of her breasts, her inner thighs, and her lower abdomen and hips, dodging beneath the slender strings that hold the tiny patches of fabric together. In due time, every square inch of her exposed skin, and a bit that is covered, has lovingly had sunscreen lotion applied, and I have the photographic evidence to prove it.

I don’t have to provide any prompting for the boys to both get up and extend an arm down. Audrey takes both hands and allows them to pull her to her feet. After a dramatic pause with their faces all close together, Audrey looking down ever-so-slightly due to her small height advantage, she lets go of their hands and runs her fingers through the hair on the backs of the heads of the twins. Stepping forward a half-step, she gently pulls their heads to either side of her face, their bodies lightly brushing against hers, their outside hands coming to rest on her hips. She murmurs thank you into their ears and places a very light kiss on each cheek. I ask the ‘actors’ to hold the pose for a few moments and just look at one another intently while I shoot wide shots of their entire bodies and closeups of their faces. All three kids closely hold on to each other, their cheeks getting flushed and their breathing shaky. Jesus fuck, I am so hard watching this! I glance down lower, and the bulges inside the boys’ swimsuits are unmistakable now.

“I think it might be time to head to the other beach,” I suggest quietly.

Audrey casts a smoky gaze from one twin’s face to another. “Yeah,” she murmurs simply.

“Okay,” the twins mumble in reply with sly grins.

The kids separate to gather up their things into the bag, and Evan (as I learn from his brother calling his name) puts the bag over his shoulder. Audrey takes his free hand then holds out her other hand to take Owen’s. Together, they stroll in silence down to the end of the beach while I snap pics along the way from in front of them, behind them, and many angles between. They look perfect together, with just the right combination of young, friendly innocence and simmering sexual tension. Once we run out of sand, we retrace our steps from yesterday, tip-toeing through the dense tropical foliage, before emerging into the secluded beach area. I jog forward, and sure enough, the shadows cast by the overhang of the surrounding trees have moved just enough to put my target location into a nice mix of sun and shade. I kick off my sandals and note with satisfaction that the sand feels comfortable, not at all hot on my skin. The stiff breeze coming in off the water is perfect: it will keep the kids cool in the warm air temperature and will dry the sweat that they’re probably going to be working up.

Now that we’re here, the metaphorical temperature amongst the kids is clearly starting to rise higher. While I load a fresh battery pack and memory card into my main camera and unpack my backup equipment to have them ready, they are forced to stand there, still holding hands, waiting and imagining what will happen. Audrey’s lips are parted, and her chest rises and falls with deep, slow breaths. The twins are looking antsy, eyes darting around the little oasis and then back to each other and Audrey, with an occasional quick glance at me, their director. I can imagine that some of that tension comes from the uncertainty: they know Owen will be having anal sex with Audrey, but that’s it. No other details. I know the kids trust me, but naturally, they are curious, and not knowing is putting them a little on edge. Which is precisely how I want them. I’m betting the added excitement of submitting to my control will add to their pleasure together.

I’m finally ready and decide that the kids have also had to wait long enough. “Okay!” I call out from a distance. I zoom in and poise my finger on the shutter release. “Let’s go! Evan, you can get rid of the beach bag, then all three of you make your way over here. Only maybe start letting your hands wander.”

Evan drops the bag off his shoulder, and the three kids start strolling towards me. I can see Owen brushing a finger from his joined hand with Audrey along the outside of her leg, causing her to smile in his direction. Evan releases her hand and sidles up closer to her side, Audrey turning to him with interest as he slips his arm behind her waist and rests his palm on her hip. I hear Owen snort, and, not to be outdone, he duplicates his brother’s maneuver on Audrey’s other side. I see her draw a breath and look down, and I zoom and focus in to see that Owen has inserted his fingers under the slender cord that wraps around her hip, holding up Audrey’s thong. Cheeky bugger!

The trio has reached the location now, and Audrey decides it’s her turn. “I want to feel you guys,” she tells them. She gracefully pirouettes out of the boys’ loose grasps and faces them, raises her hands up to their hairless chests, and delicately places her fingertips to their skin. Evan and Owen start to reach for her breasts. “Let me just do it to you right now,” she quietly admonishes them, which I agree is the right call. The twins keep their arms lowered as she begins tracing her fingers up to their shoulders, down their arms, and then returning to start down to their tight abdomens, all over their skin and lean muscles. She steps a little closer to them, their bodies almost touching, as her fingers travel lower still, crossing over the snug waistbands of the tiny swimsuits. I ease my way closer, kneeling down to one side of Audrey’s essentially naked bum, and focus in on Evan’s barely-encased groin, as she continues to reach lower, turns her wrist, and then lightly grasps his entire cock and balls through the thin polyester barrier. Owen inhales at the same time as Evan, letting me know the action is the same in her other hand. She makes a suave-sounding hum while she manipulates their engorged meat. “All set to go again, I see!” she murmurs. I hear the smirk in her voice as she grips a little harder. The boy’s body twitches slightly as Audrey raises and lowers her hand slowly.

I stand back up and move around to the side, wanting another angle. I see that as Audrey continues to feel up the boys, the twins’ arms remain resolutely at their sides, as ordered, even as they squirm. I grin as I snap away. “When are they allowed to start touching you again?” I ask Audrey with amusement.

“Hmmm … I guess they can nowwwww …” she answers, gazing invitingly at Evan and then at Owen.

The twins accept the invitation. Immediately Audrey has hands all over her body, sliding all over her skin and squeezing her breasts, ass, and crotch. She doesn’t let go of the stiff prizes in her grasp, though. The three kids are making noises of arousal as they grope each other liberally. Even as the forbidden body parts are being fondled through minimal material, thus far, the swimsuits, small as they are, have been keeping those parts concealed from view.

I figure it’s about time for that to change. “One of you boys, untie Audrey’s top behind her back,” I instruct quietly, still snapping away. Owen pulls the knot free, followed by Evan lifting the tiny garment from behind her neck and discarding it. She moans a little louder as her small mounds are now being squeezed, and her nipples are being tweaked unimpeded. This continues for a minute, Audrey arching her back, pushing her breasts forward towards the boys.

“Use your mouths too, guys,” I suggest. I don’t have to ask twice. In an instant, both boys have leaned down and latched onto the tit closest to them and proceed to begin nursing enthusiastically. “Ugnnnnnnnn!” groans Audrey, clearly enjoying the new attention. The boys are obviously getting very worked up, very quickly. Their slim hips humping against Audrey’s grip on their equipment. Ah, to be that young again! Even if they’ve got very little left in the tank, they’re eager to squirt out whatever they’ve got as soon as possible.

Too eager, in fact. I want those little peckers hard for some time yet. “Slow it down a bit, guys,” I tell the twins. “We’re not in a hurry. if we take our time, it’ll be even better!”

Evan releases Audrey’s nipple from his mouth with a smack. “Tell HER that!” he gasps, grinning up at my girl. Owen’s laugh is stifled by the preteen breast he is continuing to suckle on. Audrey giggles, squeezing and lifting their junk again, causing both boys to moan out loud.

I snort. “You too, Lil’ Bit. Take it easy on them,” I say, my voice dripping with faux sympathy for the twins’ plight.

“But it’s not fair!” Audrey whines sarcastically, continuing to grope the boys. “They’re ganging up on me, two against one!” She gasps as Evan attacks her breast again.

Now it’s Owen’s turn to pull his mouth off of her chest. “Yeah, right! Like you don’t enjoy it!” he fires back with an enormous smirk. She giggles again, and then he’s back on her. Audrey produces a loud and passionate exclamation and thrusts her chest into their faces as they work their mouths over her small mounds.

The boys are getting grabbier and more forceful. Evan firmly grasps Audrey by a small ass cheek while Owen puts his arm around her waist, and together they pull her into the twins’ bodies. Their other hands are trying to get to her pussy. Audrey isn’t letting up, either, throwing her head back and coercing moans of increasing volume from the boys with every tug of their packages.

All three kids are getting carried away by their hormones, similar to what happened here on the beach yesterday. It’s natural, and I know they’re excited, but they’re going ‘off script’ here. And it’s not just that I have an alluring photo story I want to create. It’s also that I know this will be a better and more memorable experience for the kids this time if they are patient and let me coach them through this. I need them to focus!

“Okay, guys. Hold on a sec,” I tell them, trying to get their attention. The escalation of the grabbing, suckling, moaning and squirming doesn’t slow in the slightest. They don’t appear to have heard me, or they just aren’t listening to me.

I raise my voice a little. “All right, you three. I’m telling you, you should slow down!”

“Sco-o-o-o-tt!” Audrey complains, eyes squeezed shut, head still craned skyward. “Not nowwwww!” Emboldened by Audrey’s little display of defiance, the boys also don’t back down. Owen straightens to his full height, latches his mouth onto Audrey’s neck, and plunges his fingers down into the front of her thong. Meanwhile, Evan is using his mouth and hands to maul her tits and ass with even greater effort. Audrey groans out loudly in appreciation.

A sudden flash of annoyance fills my head. At this rate, the boys are going to cum soon in their swimsuits. They might be young, but if I let them nut for a third time this morning, they really won’t be able to get it up again to do anything more. But, c’mon, I’m trying to help them! They’re going to love my plan if they could just try to follow my directions. They did it their way yesterday, but today they are damn well going to listen to me!

“HEY!” I say, almost shouting. “Would you all please just STOP for a sec! NOW!!”

This outburst finally gets through to them. My history in the military probably gives my voice an authoritative and intimidating tone. Instantly all three of them are immobile, staring at me warily and frozen by my sharp command.

I feel immediate regret: I didn’t want to scare them. “I’m sorry,” I say, more gently this time. But I am genuinely still a bit irritated with them. “I just… I know you’re doing a lot of stuff that feels great. But this is also still a photoshoot! I direct you guys, and you follow my directions, same as any other shoot. You got it?”

“Okay,” all three reply quietly in unison, awkwardly withdrawing their hands off of each other and stepping a bit apart, awaiting my instructions timidly. I’m reminded of my Grade 6 teacher in school who would slam a yardstick on her desk to restore order when we got too rowdy. I figured out much later that parents, teachers, coaches, and other adults sometimes have to demonstrate authority if they want to keep control. Children often just need to be startled into compliance if they aren’t behaving. Now, at this moment, I have to remember that even though Audrey and the twins are doing things that are usually thought of as for adults, these kids are… well… still just kids!

“Good,” I tell them, completely calm now. “Remember, I know you guys are going to really love this, but we’re going to work our way up to it, gradually. It’s called ‘foreplay’, and it makes everything even better when you’re patient. You just have to trust that I know what I’m doing.” I look at the twins one at a time. “Do you trust me?”

“Yes, Mister H,” they answer obediently.

I glance at Audrey. “And you? You still trust me, Lil’ Bit?”

“Yeah, yeah,” she answers, sounding grumpy. But I also see her give me a tiny grin, letting me know she holds no hard feelings.

“All right,” I say, “remember that the story is that the girl has just met the boys for the first time. Yes, we’re showing them to be open to exploring one another, but we don’t want them to just be all over each other right away, like porn actors.” The kids all snicker at the idea of them being porn stars as I turn my attention back to the twins. “I want you two to go back to Audrey, same as before, only this time not so fast. Touch her gently, give her nice kisses, lavish her with attention.” Then I look at Audrey. “You do the same. Be more… shy. Act like yesterday didn’t actually happen.”

I start photographing again as the kids tentatively come back together again. They take things easier this time. The boys take turns locking lips with Audrey while the other kisses her neck. They lightly caress her body, fingers running all over her skin. Their hands detour to her breasts for brief pinches and squeezes, but they don’t linger. Audrey’s hands also wander, cupping the twins’ asses and cocks briefly through their swimsuits, then retreating. Their breathing is heavier now. Audrey has a fire in her eyes, and the twins look horny as hell. Yet they’re still in control. I think they’re getting the hang of how foreplay works!

“I want to see you all from the front,” I tell them, getting in closer. The boys back away to either side of Audrey, kind of forming a tight semi-circle around me. Without me needing to prompt her, Audrey pulls Owen to her and kisses him quite passionately. He returns the kiss while Evan runs his experienced fingers over her shoulders and back, reaching around to her sides and front. About a minute (and dozens of photos) later, Audrey switches brothers. As she necks with Evan and is felt up by Owen, her chest is noticeably heaving now. I smile to myself. There’s a long way to go here, and even taking it slow, she’s already all worked up.

I look up from my camera. “Lil’ Bit,” I call out softly. Audrey breaks her kiss with Evan and pants as they both look back at me. “Crane your neck back and up.” She does so, forcing her preteen mounds forward, which look fabulous as they rise and fall with each breath. From behind her, Owen is cupping underneath one of her little tits. Evan almost looks like he’s going to drool. “Go ahead with your mouth,” I tell him. “Gently and carefully this time.”

“Okay,” Evan mutters, lowering his face and delicately taking one of her nipples between his lips. Audrey groans, and her body shudders. I wish the photo I just took could capture that sound and movement.

“Tilt your head away from me a bit, Audrey,” I instruct. I snap several closeups of her neck as Owen leans forward and starts kissing her there, pressing his body into her from behind. I zoom out a touch to capture both boys sweetly nursing on Audrey’s sensitive skin. Her eyes are closed, and her jaw is slack. Beautiful!

We’re going to keep things slow, but It’s time to move this forward. I can’t torture the poor kids forever, here! I back away a few feet. “All right, don’t worry about facing me now. Just stand in a line, one boy facing Audrey in front and the other behind.” The boys don’t stop their oral pleasure as they shuffle around a little, and now the three kids are more tightly packed together. “Now, Audrey. Reach behind you with both hands, run your palms up and down Owen’s hips. When yo-”

There is a sudden smack sound as the mouth on Audrey’s neck is pulled off. “Um-” the boy behind Audrey says with a grin. “Actually… I’m Evan!”

His brother’s lips withdraw from Audrey’s breast. “Yeah, I’m Owen,” he adds, smirking.

“Seriously?” I say. I thought I knew which was which. Are they just fucking with me now?

The boy behind Audrey grins even wider. He turns a little toward me and pulls down the front of his Speedo a couple of inches, exposing not just the hairless base of his cock, but also his birthmark. The three kids get a laugh at my expense.

“Ah, shit!” I grumble good-naturedly. “Okay then, you assholes, switch places! I want Owen behind Audrey!” The twins giggle again as they take up their new positions.

I give them a minute to warm back up to what they were doing, with the real Evan now feasting on Audrey’s small tits. Owen is working on her neck from behind, his pelvis pressed into her butt. “Okay,” I tell Audrey while she’s at the center of the boys’ attention, “like I started to say before, rub up and down on Owen’s hips behind you. When you find the waistband of his swimsuit, push them down as far as you can reach. And…” I wink and smile at her, “… take your time!”

“Got it!” Audrey gasps in reply, then moans softly as her head lolls further over from Owen’s ministrations under her ear, her ponytail billowing to the side from a stiff gust of wind. Reaching behind her arched back, she slides her palms over his ribs, causing a muffled snort of ticklishness from the boy. Her hands move down over the tight swimsuit to his hairless legs, then back up to his waist. Teasingly, she repeats the motion a few times, her thumbs catching the waistband just a little on each try before the stretchy fabric snaps back. Owen groans and pulls her body tighter to himself, switching sides to start putting hickeys on the other side of her neck. Evan takes the opportunity to switch nipples.

The added arousal makes it difficult for Audrey to resist temptation. With the next stroke of her hands on Owen’s body, her thumbs successfully gain purchase on the suit, and she starts pushing it down over his hips. I focus the camera’s lens on Owen’s groin, and I trigger the shutter just as his stiff little adolescent cock launches up out of its confines and smacks Audrey on her naked butt cheek. Owen gasps happily, wiggling his lower body to assist Audrey’s hands, and his bathing suit plops to the sand around his feet, where he kicks it away. Then his arms wrap around Audrey’s body more securely, pulling himself tightly into Audrey’s back, his penis finding space between her upper thighs. They both exhale and gasp heavily as their bodies mold together.

One kid successfully naked, two to go. God damn, this is so hot! “Evan, Audrey, can you two kiss each other again now?” I ask them, my voice a little shaky. Audrey lowers her head, and Evan raises his, they meet in the middle and thrust their tongues in each other’s mouths passionately while holding each other close. “Now, do the same job with Evan’s swimsuit as you did with Owen’s. Okay?”

Audrey mumbles acknowledgment without breaking the kiss and starts moving her palms sensuously up and down the sides of Evan’s body. Like with his brother, Evan is teased with several “failed attempts” by Audrey to grab sufficient hold of the tight swimsuit’s waistband. She moans into his mouth with every deliberate movement of the twins. Inevitably, though, she manages to peel the suit down over Evan’s hips, revealing the second half of the gorgeous matching pair of cocks and asses. Like Owen, Evan wriggles the Speedo down to his ankles and then flicks the garment away with his toe. Then his cock is gone from my view as he pulls tightly and presses as much of his totally naked skin as he can up against Audrey.

I circle around to the other side, partly to use the tropical foliage as a different background for the writhing children and partly because I hope that by moving, I’ll shift the position of my cock against the front of my shorts and relieve some of the pressure that’s building up. I’m not succeeding with my second rationale, unfortunately. Ah well!

“All right, boys,” I murmur. “See what you can do with those knots.” It only takes seconds for them to show what they can do because it’s pretty simple. I take some great close-up images of Owen pulling the knot free on Audrey’s hip that I can see, followed by the slender strings falling away from her bare hip, and finally, the tiny thong is pulled away and flung clear by Evan.

All three kids make really happy noises as the twins and Audrey sandwich their fully nude bodies securely together. Evan and Audrey’s mouths only separate long enough for brief coos and groans of pleasure, and Owen is lovingly attacking the nape of Audrey’s neck. The boys are thrusting their hips at a measured pace, humping out of a biological need that I can understand, regardless of my desire for them to take things slow. Their thrusts are coordinated, lunging forward at the same time.

I crouch all the way down to the sand and shoot from an upward camera angle beside Owen. With each hump of the boy, I can briefly see the knobs of the twins’ boy dicks sliding beside each other between Audrey’s legs, the tops of their shafts glistening with lubrication provided by rubbing on her excited pussy. Oh fuck, this is nice! The pressure from my shorts on my cock is almost unbearable, and the ache in my balls rises up another notch. I keep taking photos with my right hand while I fumble with the drawstring of my shorts with my left. Finally, I find the correct end and pull out the knot, loosening the waistband, allowing me to push them down over my hips and ass. I gasp in momentary relief as my cock forcefully springs free. After extricating myself fully from my shorts, I instinctively give the shaft a quick tug. It is so engorged, more than any time I can remember! Hard as a rock, twitching slightly with each beat of my heart and almost red in color.

But I’ve got no time to do anything about that. I have to guide the kids to the next phase of my informal script. “All right, guys!” I call out, still crouched down. They look over at me, smirking widely at me as they notice my naked condition for the first time. “Lower yourselves down to your knees, but keep hold of each other.”

The kids snicker as they awkwardly fumble through the task, trying to coordinate their movements without having to pull their bodies apart. Owen stumbles as he and Audrey trip over each other’s feet and drop to their knees in the sand, bumping into Evan. “Ouff!” Audrey cries out, laughing. “You two are squashing me!”

“Sorry!” they apologize, grinning and taking the opportunity to ‘help’ her by holding and groping her body with their hands all over as they pull apart for a moment. Audrey takes hold of the opportunity as well, reaching down in front of and behind herself to grab hold of two erect cocks. She pumps them both slowly, enjoying the power and control she has over the boys. They’re enjoying it, as well, moaning with pleasure with every stroke of Audrey’s fists. She continues this for a minute or so. Then she looks at me, stops jerking her flesh toys, and lets go. I nod in approval, satisfied that she understands that it’s time to move on. She and I share a devious smile as the boys complain pitifully at the interruption of their handjobs.

This part will be a little more complicated, and I lower my camera. “Owen, back up a bit,” I say next. Owen reluctantly releases Audrey and back walks on his knees. “You two,” I say to Evan and Audrey, “spread your knees apart.” The kids maneuver around, still holding onto each other’s waists, their bodies pressed together from thighs to foreheads. Satisfied that they have opened their knees wide enough, I look back to Owen. “Okay. Now sit down and put your feet in between their legs.”

“Like, with no towel?” Owen asks. “Just sit down right on the sand?”

“Yup! You don’t need a towel,” I reply, smiling. “Just keep your junk out of the sand. It’ll be fine.”

Gingerly, Owen sets his bare butt down on the beach behind Audrey, and I motion for him to scooch forward until her ass is directly in front of his face. He gets an evil grin on his face and plants a big smooch on each cheek. Audrey shrieks with delight, and I chuckle. “Now lay down,” I tell Owen, “right down on your back.” He complies, fully reclining in the soft sand, his hands resting on Audrey’s calves as she straddles him. He wiggles to even out the sand beneath him, his erect penis waggling along with his body.

Next, I address Audrey. “You were feeling awfully flexible earlier back in the cabin,” I tell her softly. “Want to try something like that again?” She smiles broadly and nods. “Okay then. Recline back.” Her eyes light up as she understands what I’m thinking of. Evan understands as well, and he lets go of his hold on Audrey’s body.

I touch my hand lightly behind her back to give her support if she needs it. But she doesn’t. Putting all her weight on her knees and ankles, her well-exercised stomach and leg muscles are easily strong enough to lower herself gracefully backward, her body coming to rest atop Owen’s chest in a ‘reclining hero’ yoga pose. His cock catches briefly under her butt but then is free and sticking straight up, between her legs and bumping up against her pussy. Then Audrey relaxes, both children exhaling heavily as Owen’s arms wrap comfortingly across her abdomen and chest, cupping one of her breasts. I’m taking pictures again now, and it’s such a beautiful image. Then they are squirming again, pelvises flexing as Owen’s length saws slowly up and down, rubbing up against her sex.

Evan watches, straddling Owen’s shins, with his cock protruding straight out. He looks awestruck at the way Audrey is splayed open and how Owen’s penis is pumping up and down between her legs, seeking a hole to sink into. Their cute noises of arousal are starting to get louder again. I nudge Evan on his shoulder. “You ready to help your brother?” I ask him.

“Help him how?” he asks, still staring intently down at the crotches of the other two kids.

I remember I haven’t yet told Evan his part in this plan. “You’re going to help Owen to make Audrey feel good,” I tell him. “Keep touching her, using your hands on her. Once he’s inside her, you keep working on her tits and pussy. Then you can jerk off on them when they’re done or try to cum at the same time.”

“Oh! Okay!” Evan exclaims agreeably as I refocus my camera. He grins and leans forward, firmly squeezes one hand onto Audrey’s unoccupied breast, and starts thumbing her clit vigorously with his other hand.

“Oooooaaaaaahhhhh!” Audrey moans loudly. “Not so fast, not so fast, not so fast!”

Evan stops short. Owen also freezes his mouth right beside her ear. “Are you okay?” he asks softly, with genuine concern.

“Yeah!” she gasps. “I just… want things to last… want you guys to… have fun, too!”

“Smart girl!” I murmur, gliding around the trio, capturing images as fast as my camera can take them.

The boys get back to lightly caressing and fingering Audrey’s erogenous zones while she reaches between her legs to rub Owen’s cock between her pussy lips with one hand and gently tugging on Evan’s cock with her other. No one says anything for the next couple of minutes. At least, no articulable words are spoken. But there are plenty of unintelligible grunts and heaving breaths to harmonize with the sounds of smooth skin sliding against skin and moist sounds of fingers manipulating genitals.

“Audrey,” I announce, “we’re going to see how tight your bum is now, all right?”

“Okay,” she replies with confidence. I can tell she is resolute in her decision to do this.

I put a hand on Evan’s back. “See if you can slide your finger in, okay?”

“Okay, Mister H,” Evan responds seriously. With his left hand, he guides Audrey’s hand (and Owen’s cock with it) down and away from between her legs. With his right, he feels to find her puckered asshole. “Can you try to open up now?” he asks Audrey politely.

Audrey giggles, then through the camera’s small screen, I see her flex the muscles below her digestive tract. Immediately, Evan’s index finger disappears into her rectum, making her gasp. Evan carefully moves his finger in and out, twisting the angle of his finger as he goes. “Are you okay, Lil’ Bit?” I ask. Audrey groans in the affirmative. I grin and glance at Evan. “How’s she feel?”

“Good, I think. It’s really slippery in there!” he replies, grinning back at me. “You must have put a lot of that oil in!”

“Always better to have too much than not enough,” I tell him, setting the camera down for a moment. “Remember, the inside of your butt isn’t naturally slippery, and if you don’t have lube, it can be really painful for both people. Also, make sure her opening has plenty of oil all the way around it.” Evan works the tip of his finger around the inside surface of the ring of muscle, making Audrey squirm. I look closely at his work, and I’m pretty sure that Owen’s slim-ish tool will be a snug but perfect fit for Audrey’s virgin asshole.

While he’s doing this, I retrieve the can of oil from the beach bag. After taking off the lid, I touch the open can to Audrey’s hand, still wrapped around Owen’s prick between her thighs. “All right,” I tell Audrey, knowing she can’t see from her position laying back on the boy’s chest, “feel into the can and scoop up a little oil, then rub it on Owen’s cock. That’ll help, as well.” Audrey dutifully follows my instructions, thoroughly enjoying the way Owen writhes and moans beneath her as she slathers his penis in the natural lubricant.

I think they’re more than ready now, and I motion to Evan to remove his greasy finger from Audrey. Fascinated, I watch the hole wink closed again, although I know it will open again easily. I prepare myself and my camera and clear my dry throat. “Okay, guys. I think it’s time!”

“I can’t see down there,” Owen notes, his voice cracking from the excitement. “How… what do I…?”

“It’s okay,” I assure him. “Evan will aim you.” Evan nods and grasps Owen’s slick cock away from Audrey, squeezing and jerking it lightly. I lock eyes with my girl. “You ready?”

Her eyes are twinkling with a mix of determination and lust. “Uh-huh!” she pants, holding a fist up to me.

I chuckle and return the fist bump. “Good!” I tell her, restabilizing the camera. “Lift your bum up off of Owen, and slide your shoulders down his chest, just an inch or so.”

She arches her back and butt up and wiggles into position, her back door now directly over the base of Owen’s cock. I’m in position as well, ready to capture this moment. “Okay. Evan, aim Owen towards her butthole.” Evan peers through Audrey’s thighs and carefully positions Owen’s shaft straight up, the circumcised head pushing apart her cheeks and slotting against her closed anus. She gasps in anticipation. “And now, Audrey, open yourself up. And let your butt come down. Slowly.”

Audrey is using a lot of different muscles to hold herself up in such an unusual position. Her stomach is tense in order to hold the arch in her back. Now I’ve asked her to open her sphincter as well. I had been unaware that controlling so many muscle groups within her abdomen in unfamiliar combinations at once could turn out to be challenging. Just as she’s flexing her anal opening, her ability to hold the arch suddenly disappears, and her torso drops down heavily.

With only one direction open for it to go, Owen’s cock is driven straight into Audrey’s rectum, bending upwards to follow the channel back toward her colon. In the blink of an eye, Owen is balls deep in her! Oh shit!

Both kids cry out urgently at the sudden deep penetration. Audrey’s eyes are huge, and her mouth hangs open as she pants hard and groans loudly with each exhale. “Audrey!” I almost shout. “Are you okay?”

Audrey manages to nod her head up and down as she continues to pant and moan, gazing in a wide-eyed and slack-jawed vacant stare, straight up to the sky. She’s overwhelmed by new sensations, but I’m glad she’s apparently not feeling too much discomfort. I check out Owen as well, but I guess I need not worry about him: it’s obvious he’s pretty happy with his lot in life at the moment. He’s panting as well, but in an extremely cute little high-pitched note, and his smiling face is a mask of pure ecstasy. His arms are wrapped around Audrey supportively, and he’s giving her small kisses on her neck.

“How’s it feel?” Evan asks, surprising me with how earnestly he’s taking his role as coach and caretaker. His palms rest on Audrey’s thighs, his cock rigid and sticking straight out.

Both of the other kids answer at the same time. “Full!” mutters Audrey, while Owen gasps, “Tight!”. All three find that funny, Audrey managing to gasp out a giggle and Owen a stunted guffaw. Owen gives his hips a little thrust, probably out of instinct. Audrey groans loudly again. “Wait!” she cries out. “Just give me… a minute… okay?” she stammers through her heavy breaths.

“Okay,” whispers Owen, tense but still. His breathing is ragged, undoubtedly feeling tremendous pleasure with his dick buried deep in Audrey’s hot tunnel.

Satisfied that Audrey is handling the intrusion as well as could be expected, I return to my photography. Owen has found himself so far inside Audrey that his pubescent ballsack is pressed directly up to her taint, leaving no visible sign at all of his cock. Good lord, this is getting me very bothered!

I glance at Evan, who is staring enraptured at where his brother’s dick disappears into their friend’s ass. I think he’s at least as turned on by this as I am. “Evan,” I murmur, “why don’t you try touching Audrey again? Lightly. Caress her, like a light massage. I bet that would help.”

“Right,” he murmurs back, forcing himself to tear his eyes away. He starts sliding his fingers and palms over Audrey’s skin, not grabbing or pinching, just gentle petting and stroking. I notice a difference right away as Audrey’s heaving breaths begin to settle down. Within a minute or so, she’s still breathing deeply, but her noises sound much less anxious. “Are you okay now?” Evan asks.

“Yeah!” Audrey sighs, still gazing skyward. “It feels… weird, I guess, but… good, too!”

“You feel incredible!” Owen adds dreamily, squeezing Audrey’s body a little harder. “I love the way we… we FIT together!” His hips spasm again, pushing up against her, forcing his cock to twitch within her.

“Aaaaaahhh!!” Audrey moans. “That feels sooooooo… can you… please do that… agaaaain!”

Owen obliges. He pulls back gently, his cock withdrawing no more than an inch, then eases it back in, continuing to push for a second after hitting bottom. And then, he repeats the process very carefully and slowly. A cute little grunt escapes his throat with each small thrust, in time with groans from Audrey. “Oh my god…” she gasps haltingly, “… your thing… is way bigger… than your finger…” She pauses to whimper through several small pelvic lunges, pushes her head back over to one of Owen’s shoulders, and turns to bring their faces close together. “But also feels… WAY… more awesome!” With that, she mashes a deep kiss onto Owen, humming slow staccato noises of pleasure directly into his mouth. Dutifully encouraged, Owen kisses back while increasing the tempo of his humping slightly, pulling out a bit further with each deliberate thrust.

Meanwhile, Evan is working his light massage higher on Audrey’s body, working over her breasts. He coaxes her legs apart a little further so he can kneel on the sand in between her knees and Owen’s thighs. Then he leans forward so he can reach higher on Audrey’s body. His butt is now blocking my ability to snap more images of the base of Owen’s dick bobbing in and out of Audrey’s bum hole, but I probably have enough shots of that already. Lowering his head, Evan takes one of Audrey’s nipples into his mouth once again, sucking and squirming in rhythm with his brother’s thrusts while running his palms up and down the sides of her body from her face down to her legs and back again.

Audrey’s moans convey her appreciation of Evan’s efforts. Panting, she breaks off her kiss with Owen and smiles broadly at him. “Mind if your… brother gets… a kiss too?” she rasps.

Owen grins. “Uh… Uh… Go… ahead! … Uh… Uh… Uh…” he replies, his pace of fucking continuing unabated.

I love the way these kids don’t show any jealousy towards one another, even in the middle of brand new sexual experiences. Their genuine affection is obvious to see through my camera’s lens. Audrey takes Evan’s face in her hands, where he is suckling on her nipple. She pulls gently, and Evan crawls higher up on top of her body so that they can energetically share their tongues and lips with each other. Owen latches his mouth back onto Audrey’s neck. All three of their bodies are in synchronized squirming now.

With their faces now all so close together, I have to get some close-up shots so we can preserve what these emotions look like. Audrey twists her face back to Owen, and they engage in another sloppy kiss. Then the twins exchange a look, and they also lean together, stretching their necks to lock lips in a passionate smooch of brotherly love. Audrey doesn’t want to be left out, and she inserts herself from the side as best she can, tittering lightly through her rhythmic grunts as they engage in a three-way French kiss. There’s a child-like silliness to all this, but also an aura of intense sexuality that just exudes from these preteen children. The combination is so potent! And it makes the images of their faces as they share this so fucking sexy!

And then, the expressions on their faces all simultaneously transform to surprise, even shock! Their bodies cease their coordinated humping. “What happened? What’s wrong?” I immediately ask.

Audrey’s eyes are wide again, and her mouth has formed a small ‘O’. she is beginning to take short, rapid breaths. Evan’s jaw is slack, his eyes unfocused. Only Owen seems to have some of his wits about him. “What the fuck, Dude!” he whispers, awe in his voice. “Did you… did you just…”

And then I start to suspect what has just happened! I look at the bodies in front of me and instantly note that Evan has laid down on top of Audrey to participate in all the kissing from moments ago. He’s directly on top of her, his pelvis resting on her crotch between her spread knees, where a moment ago, his body was practically thrashing atop hers. I spring to my feet and crouch back down close to the boys’ feet, peering down between Evan’s legs. Christ almighty, it DID happen! I swallow hard as I examine two young scrotums resting together, Evan’s laying on top of Owen’s. More significant than that, however, is that the penises that accompany those two sets of testicles are both now planted deep within Audrey. Owen’s is still in her butt, while Evan has buried his in her pussy. When he was humping on her, he must have been sliding his cock overtop of her gash, where the tip of his dick inadvertently lodged into her vagina on his last lunge, and he sank into her to the hilt in one stroke. The twins have accidentally double penetrated her!

I didn’t intend this to happen or even think of the possibility. But now that it has… oh my fucking god, how outrageously HOT is this?!? I feel an involuntary twitching in my stiff, neglected member. Jesus, I need to make myself cum so bad! But I can’t, I can’t miss any of what is happening! I remember I’m holding a camera in my hands, and I use it to commit the insanely arousing images to its flash memory card.

But before I let myself get any further carried away, I lean over to check on Audrey to make sure this all isn’t too much for her. She’s taking in large gulps of air but at a measured pace, such that I don’t think she’s in any danger of hyperventilating. “Holy crap, Lil’ Bit! Are you all right?”

“I’m… not… sure… yet!” she manages to reply between deep breaths.

Evan turns his head cautiously toward me. “Mister H,” he asks in a quivering murmur. “I’m inside her… right?” I nod in the affirmative. He whispers a quick “fuck” to himself.

Owen speaks to me next. “Is this… I don’t know…” he pauses, searching for the right word, “… ALLOWED?”

I force myself to not chuckle at his question since he’s completely serious. I’m sure the twins have never considered that two boys could ever fuck one girl at the same time. “Anything’s allowed, as long as everyone’s okay with it,” I answer him. “But we have to ask Audrey, too.” Then I lean into Audrey once more. “Hey, I didn’t plan on this happening,” I tell her gently. “You don’t have to do this. What are you feeling now?” I fully expect her to ask Evan to get off of her.

“I feel… REALLY full…” she says haltingly. A brave smile grows at the edges of her mouth. “… but… I don’t… wanna stop!” I actually feel my eyes widen. Are you serious, Lil’ Bit?

“Really?” asks Owen, almost incredulous.

“You sure, Dudette?” adds a gobsmacked Evan.

Audrey closes her eyes, takes in another big lungful of air, and exhales heavily. She smiles to herself, looking content in herself and her decision. She turns her head and meets Owen’s eyes. “I want you…” she looks back up to Evan, “… AND you…” then she closes her eyes again, almost serenely “… to BOTH fuck me!”

Oh, fuck me, indeed! I can’t believe my girl is so freaky! My poor, lonely, super-hard cock twitches again. I glance down to see beads of precum collecting at the tip of my glans before dripping down to the sand. I’m not sure Audrey is truly ready to be double-teamed like this, but a hard, throbbing part of me certainly is excited to see her try.

For their part, the boys don’t pause to contemplate the wisdom of Audrey’s choice. Immediately, both of them pull back their hips and then push themselves back in. “Fuuuuuuuuuuuuck!” they both groan in unison.

“Aaaaaaaaaaaaahhhhhhh!” wails Audrey. She takes another big breath as the twins withdraw, then lets loose again when they carefully slide into her again. “Oh yeeeeeeeah!…” she cries out again. “… It’s SO… muuuuuch!!!” she cries out as she is filled a third time.

And with that, just as she asked them to, Evan and Owen both start fucking her, albeit pretty gently and slowly to start with. Being such close twins, I’m not surprised that they establish the same rhythm, flexing their hips at the same time, thrusting into Audrey together. The twins’ faces are masks of concentration, wincing a little with each slow, coordinated push. “Fuck…” Evan mutters, grimacing. “… So… tight!”

“Yeah… tighter than… before!” Owen grunts through his clenched jaw.

With each deep invasion of both her orifices, Audrey groans loudly. It sounds kind of painful, actually, and with her eyes squeezed shut tightly, her facial expression doesn’t exactly convey pleasure. I snap a few awfully hot pictures, but I’m concerned for her. “Hold up, guys,” I tell the boys. They moan through another thrust and stop moving when they are fully inside their respective holes. Audrey bellows out another intense cry.

I lean in closer to their faces. “This is hurting you,” I murmur to Audrey bluntly, setting aside any pretense of playing along to sexy role-playing.

She huffs several breaths, eyes still shut tight. “It doesn’t really hurt,” she grumbles. “I can do it!”

I sigh at her stubbornness. “Lil’ Bit, sex isn’t supposed to be something you… ENDURE, just because you can take it. It should be pleasurable! And it doesn’t look to me like this is very fun!”

“I don’t want you to do it if it hurts you,” whispers Owen, his mouth right next to Audrey’s ear.

“Me neither,” adds Evan softly, his compassionate expression the same as his brother’s.

“But I said it doesn’t hurt!” she fires back at me, still gasping. “Well, not… not really! I’m just so… STUFFED! Like everything up there is… getting squished up when… they’re inside me like this!”

“So it IS uncomfortable, then!” I confirm, leading to a reluctant nod. In my mind, that settles it. “Then, we need to sto-”

“Wait!” Evan says suddenly, looking down at his brother. “If it’s, like, both of us at the same time, that’s the problem…”

“Yeah … oh YEAH!!” chimes in Owen excitedly, instantly understanding his twin’s thoughts. “Dudette, can you let us try one more thing? Please?”

“Okay…” mutters Audrey, unsure of what the boys are talking about. But, frankly, I’m curious too.

Evan puts his hands on the sand to either side of Owen’s chest, pushing himself up and taking his weight off of Audrey, his cock still firmly planted inside her pussy. “Alright, I’ll start,” he murmurs to Owen, who nods back.

With careful, controlled effort, Evan pulls his hips back, his young penis coming close to falling out of Audrey’s vagina, though he keeps the tip lodged in the mouth of the slick tunnel. Audrey noticeably relaxes. Then, just as he begins easing back in, Owen is pulling his hard dick out of her hot ass, leaving just the knob of his shaft inside the tight outer ring as Evan bottoms out gently. The boys gasp. Audrey inhales sharply and moans, but it’s a happy-sounding moan.

After a few seconds, the boys start to reverse their positions again, with Owen sliding deeper back into Audrey’s ass and Evan withdrawing from her pussy. I get what the boys are doing now! They’re trying to make sure that their timing is synchronized now so that they’re not fully inside her at the same time, hoping that will make things less ‘compressed’ for Audrey. This is really good thinking!

And it looks like it might be working! Whether it’s Evan’s weight no longer pushing down on her or not being filled up completely at once, Audrey clearly is not feeling the need to fight it any longer. After Owen’s cock completes its maximum penetration and begins pulling back, Audrey emits a new kind of sound as Evan pushes forward again. “OOOOoooooaaaaaAAAAAOHHHHHH!” she moans, repeating a similar noise after the pistoning actions reverse directions once more. Her mouth is agape. And her eyes are so huge, I swear they might pop out of her skull. I think it’s safe to say she is completely enjoying this now!

It’s also a sure bet that the boys are very happy at this point. “Holy fuck!” mutters Evan as they gradually increase their pace.

“Dude!” moans Owen. “I can feel your dick… rubbing on mine!”

“Yeah, me too!” grunts Evan. “You’re like… back and forth… right there under me…”

“Oh fucki-… UUAAAGH!!” cries out Owen as he lets his head fall back to the sand while his hips keep flexing.

I think I might have lost myself for a moment in all their incredible reactions. Owen’s sexy grunt snaps me out of my reverie. I raise my camera and press down on the shutter against its stop, panning and zooming across their faces and bodies as it records dozens of full-resolution images per second. I don’t want to miss ANY of this!

But after several seconds, the camera beeps that its internal memory is temporarily full, and it has to pause to write the data to the memory card. Shit! Why can’t I just… and then I remember my promise to the kids back at the cabin to shoot some of this in video. Both of my cameras can record video continuously, to the maximum capacity of their memory cards without pausing. I can even pull still images from the video afterward. Sure, they won’t have the same resolution as any of my proper stills, and that does stick in my craw. But I swallow down my disdain for video files for the sake of capturing all this. It doesn’t all have to be of the best quality. I’m not selling any of this, after all. This is just for us! Mind you, if I record in the highest-res video mode, it’ll require a lot of storage: I’d better use my backup camera with the empty card. So as fast as I can, six inches of uncomfortably-engorged cock bouncing up and down in front of me, I dash over to grab my bag, and I switch cameras as I hurry back into a crouch near the kids. Then, preparing to channel my inner videographer, I power it on, flip the mode to hi-def video capture, raise it up to eye level, and hit the record button.

Immediately, I’m aware of how my perception changes when I’m videoing something, as opposed to still photography. This is going to be my first time making an erotic video, and I’m aiming to do the best job I can for this special moment, so I have to adapt quickly. With stills, all of my concentration goes into the visual composition alone, looking for that brief moment in time where perfection is captured.

With video, on the other hand, I’m going to have to consider everything from start to finish, the way my subjects move, and the way I move around to compose the scene. I take my time and capture Owen’s head, nodding with his body thrusts, face twitching as he pants, a bead of sweat as it runs down over his earlobe and to the sand. Panning up slightly, I follow the trail of untidy feminine hair that falls from Audrey’s head, which is bobbing gently on Owen’s shoulder. I focus on Audrey’s face, her mouth opening and closing slightly as she stares into the sky with a rapturous expression. I record Audrey’s small breasts, how Owen’s fingers are caressing and pinching her nipples, the way the small mounds shake and jiggle each time the boys plunge into her. I document Evan’s little butt, his perfect round cheeks clenching and unclenching, slowly panning down to where he pumps his cock steadily in and out of Audrey’s pussy. I try to see everything.

And I’m also far more aware of sound, something that doesn’t normally enter the equation for me. The high-pitched whine of cicadas emanating from all around us. The muffled crashes of waves breaking against the shore not far away. The whooshing of the stiff breeze that is ruffling the kids’ hair. The adorably cute grunts, gasps, and groans of arousal the kids are making. The rhythmic claps and smacks of smooth, hairless skin impacting together over and over. The obscene squelches of immature cocks sliding in and out of slick and tight orifices. Fucking hell, I never really appreciated how sounds can make a scene so much more erotic than imagery alone.

Evan and Owen are both being careful to not be thrusting when the other is inside Audrey. Keeping up their syncopated beat. But the beat’s tempo is steadily rising, ever so gradually. And with the increase in speed, the ecstatic noises the kids make increase as well.

“Uh!… Uh!… Dude!” gasps Owen up to his brother, “You gonna… Uh!… cum… anytime soon?… Uh!…”

“Uh!… Not… Uh!… just yet!” Evan gasps back between little grunts. He looks down at Audrey, whose eyes are half-closed, her mouth open, constantly moaning. “You… Uh!… okay… Dudette?”

“Ughnn! Ughnn! Ughnn! UH HUH!!” Audrey groans back. “Ughnn! Ughnn!” she gasps, and her eyes squeeze shut even tighter. “Ughnnn!! Ughnnn!! UGHNN!! UGHNN!! UUGHNNN!!! UUGHNNN!!!”

From the increasing pitch and volume of Audrey’s grunts, it sounds to me like she’s getting close to popping off. From underneath her, Owen appears to have reached the same conclusion. “Dude… she’s about… to cum!… Keep going!…” While Evan moans and keeps thrusting from his push-up position, Owen feels down to diddle Audrey’s clit while also continuing to pound into her ass.

For a few seconds, Audrey’s groans accelerate even more. She falls silent for a moment, her entire body quivering before she starts wailing with the onset of an enormous orgasm. A visceral “UgggghhhhnnnnaaaaaAAAAAAAAAAHHHHH!!!!!” comes from her throat, followed by a very fast series of loud yelping “AGHH!” noises that accompany the boys’ continuing efforts to prolong her climax. Her cries grow shorter and become choked off as she has trouble pulling a good breath under all this stimulation. This continues for under thirty seconds, but to Audrey, I imagine it must feel like a heavenly eternity. All of this makes for amazing footage! As well as making for a delightfully torturous pressure buildup in my junk! Godamnit, these kids are making me so fucking horny! I’m not sure how long I can keep this up!

Finally, Audrey has to wave her arms, flailing at the twins to get them to stop fucking her. Panting and sweating, they pause and grin as she resumes gulping for breath. “Oh… my… GOD!…” she manages to exclaim. “… I’ve… NEVER… felt… like… this… before!” Owen hugs her around her stomach and chest and kisses her neck.

Meanwhile, Evan carefully lowers himself down to kiss her mouth, his cock sliding all the way back inside her while Owen gently withdraws. Even now, their coordination is perfect, and I shake my head at their uncanny connection. Audrey moans in satisfaction.

Then she breaks the kiss with a smack, her chest heaving and a pout on her face. “Why haven’t… you guys… cum yet?” she asks plaintively as Evan pushes himself back up above her and locks his elbows straight again.

I hit pause on the recording and answer for the twins. “Boys usually can’t orgasm as often as girls,” I tell her. “They’ve already cum twice this morning, so they have to work quite a bit harder for their next one!” Evan and Owen both sheepishly nod, a little embarrassed. Still breathing heavily, Audrey saucily smirks at the twins’ discomfort.

But then a flash of pain crosses her face as her eyes squeeze shut and her mouth flattens into a thin line. Evan instantly notices. “Are we hurting you again?” he asks, concerned, as he pulls back his hips an inch.

“No!” Audrey cries back, her hands flying to grab Evan by the ass, preventing him from pulling out of her. But she grimaces again, biting her lower lip and lowering her gaze. “I don’t want… to be a wimp… but I guess…” her hands fall to her ankles, “… the way I’m laying…” then she slides her palms down to her knees, back up the sides of her thighs, and to her abdomen and ribs, “… my legs and stomach… are really starting to…” she blinks hard, clearly getting emotional, “… kind of… ache, you know?”

Given the position she’s in, I’m impressed she’s been okay as long as she has. “You need to stop to rest your muscles, don’t you, Lil’ Bit?” I say.

Reluctantly, she nods her head. With no hesitation, Evan pulls himself out, accompanied by a squelching noise from Audrey’s pussy and a disappointed sigh from her mouth. After Evan straightens up to his knees, he offers his hand to Audrey, who takes it and groans in discomfort as he helps her rise to a kneeling position. Owen’s hard cock slips free from her ass with a moist pop. Still straddling Owen’s hips, she pushes herself up to her feet and exhales heavily in relief as she straightens her knees. “I’m sorry about this, guys,” she mutters, proceeding to stretch her legs and stomach muscles.

Owen has sat up, eyes level with Audrey’s butt, and is caressing her thighs as she bends her joints and flexes and relaxes her leg muscles. “It’s okay. You couldn’t help it,” he replies sincerely.

“Yeah,” agrees Evan, looking up at her from his knees and lightly holding her onto her hips. “It’s not like it’s your fault.”

“But I wanna keep going!” Audrey assures them, hurriedly trying to work the kinks out of her lower body. “You still want to do it too, don’t you?” The two young boys can’t nod fast enough. She smiles enthusiastically. “Good! Just give me a second, I’ll come back down, get in position, and we’ll start again!”

My directorial instinct intervenes, though. Since we’ve interrupted the scene, I want to change things up if I can. “You know, you don’t have to keep the exact same positions, guys,” I say. “You could keep going but change things up.”

“Yeah?” the boys reply, intrigued.

Audrey looks interested, as well. “And do what?” she asks.

I grin conspiratorially back at her. “Maybe you want the boys to try swapping? So they both know how it feels each way?”

Looking down at Evan and then behind her at Owen, Audrey raises her eyebrows and shrugs happily, indicating it’s fine with her. The twins grin as well, and they both make movements to start getting up, but I stop them with a raised hand. “Just a sec, boys,” I say, reaching into my camera bag. “First things first, we need to take care of something.” I pull a wet wipe out of its package and toss it at Owen. “Your dick was in Audrey’s butt. Before you stick it anywhere else, wipe it down as best you can, all right?” Owen blushes, lays all the way back down again, and begins wiping off his cock with the moist towelette. “Second, I’m not sure you boys need to move at all.” I look at Audrey and point downward in a circular pattern. “Just turn around!” I suggest, smiling, as I aim my camera again and hit the record button.

“Okay?” Audrey mutters uncertainly, looking adorably cute as the sun shines onto her naked skin, and she pushes aside a strand of hair that the wind has blown across her face. She steps off to the side and then re-straddles Owen’s waist, except this time facing him. Evan is still on his knees, now directly behind her. And then her face lights up brightly. “Oh! I get it!” she exclaims. Squatting back down, she giggles as she hunches down over Owen, who quickly tosses his wipe away as far as he can. I had wondered if he or Evan might not be able to stay hard, but I observe that I need not have worried: both boys are as erect as ever. Wasting no time, Audrey falls to her knees, lowers herself down to kiss Owen deeply with a content hum, and reaches down between her legs to grasp the boy’s rigid cock and point it at her pussy. With Owen’s arms wrapping around the back of Audrey’s head and her lower back, both children moan happily into each other’s mouths as she pushes her knees out into the sand and sinks all the way down onto his erection in one long, fluid motion. Jesus, that’s fucking hot!

After a long moment, Audrey languidly breaks her kiss with Owen and turns her head to make a suggestive gaze back at Evan. He appears to not require any coaching. He shuffles forward, straddling his brother’s thighs and between Audrey’s splayed knees. Hurriedly, he wiggles his knees to burrow them down a little into the sand to attain the correct position, and he presses the flared head of his cock onto the opening of her butt hole. I have a great vantage point to record this. As I zoom in and Audrey grunts softly to open herself up to Evan, it seems to me that her back door looks wider and that it opened up with less effort from her. She’s loosening up a bit, which is undoubtedly a good thing. Evan glides his palms around and over Audrey’s butt cheeks and up to her waist, where he grips her lightly and pushes forward with his hips. With little effort, his glans pop through her sphincter, drawing out a gasp from both kids.

Sweat is beading on my forehead, and I swallow hard, willing myself to not dare touch my throbbing and twitching dick, as I watch through my camera’s screen how Evan’s young cock sinks all the way into Audrey’s ass. Owen is withdrawing from her pussy at the same time, and all three preteens are making the cutest little noises of lust I can imagine. Audrey closes her eyes and straightens her neck, her face hovering close to Owen’s, but clearly focused only on the pleasures occurring between her legs.

And then, as if they had this all planned out ahead of time, the kids start fucking in earnest.

Evan and Owen begin working their hips vigorously and in a coordinated fashion, ensuring that Audrey is constantly filled by a penis but still careful to not have both thrusting forward at the same time. Audrey writhes back, her body starting to twitch from the pistoning cocks in her orifices. Evan’s palms grip Audrey’s hips, his fingers sliding into the crevice in front of her pelvis, pulling each time he plunges his cock into her asshole. Owen’s hands reach up over Evan’s wrists, grabbing Audrey’s ass cheeks, pulling her down with each of his upward thrusts into her pussy. Soft, high-pitched moans emanate non-stop from Audrey’s throat. The twins make little grunts and groans as well, gradually increasing in volume.

After a couple of minutes of this, Evan and Owen both pause at the same time, panting and staring at one another. Audrey whines pitifully. “Ooohhh… don’t stop… please!!” she complains.

The twins quickly nod at each other, their twinstincts perfectly in tune. “Want to… try something!” gasps Owen, raising the back of his head off the sand.

“Yeah…” adds Evan, gulping for air as he leans forward a bit. “… C’mere…” His hands slide up and under Audrey’s body, one grasping the nearest small tit, the other onto her upper chest under her neck, then he pulls gently. Audrey groans loudly as she allows her back to arch, and Evan pulls her up and back towards himself. “Are you… okay?” he stammers softly, his lips right behind her ear.

Audrey is unable to speak articulately, but she nods her head vigorously and mumbles agreeable noises. Noises that increase in urgency as Owen cranes his head a bit higher and latches his mouth onto a nipple. The noises get even louder when Evan starts to pinch and manipulate her other breast while nuzzling the side and back of her neck with his lips, teeth, and tongue.

And then she hollers out uncontrollably as the boys start pummelling her vagina and anus again. Audrey’s ass and hips jiggle rapidly as Owen and Evan’s hips go to work, driving two straining cocks into and out of her with increasing abandon. The boys growl and grunt louder now, trying really hard to get to their climaxes, their immature balls churning in an attempt to produce a third load of sperm in barely more than an hour. They’re less in control now, seemingly unconcerned with keeping their thrusts in opposite sync or simply unable to. But for now, it also seems Audrey isn’t suffering discomfort any longer. She shows nothing but increasing arousal, even as she is double penetrated by the twins as deeply as they can.

The three kids are locked together in a joint effort, Evan’s and Owen’s bronzed bodies thrashing on top of and below Audrey’s, the boys’ dark skin an exotic contrast to Audrey’s much lighter tan. They’re all sweating profusely now, their slim young bodies flailing and grinding and thrusting hard, gasping and crying out, desperately using every part of themselves they can to chase their need to achieve completion. My breath is getting short, and my groin is deliciously, uncomfortably tight. I can’t properly put into words how amazing this is, but fortunately for the kids and me, I’m making a digital record of it.

Suddenly Audrey starts quivering uncontrollably under all this activity. As the boys keep pounding and sucking urgently, her eyes bulge, and her mouth opens wide. And then she screeches. Loudly! It’s the most intense but unmistakably happy noise I’ve ever heard. And she doesn’t stop! She screams and yells over and over as the boys continue, tripping her climax to go on and on, one long continuous stream of the most pleasurable torture she’s ever experienced.

Finally, I think Audrey actually passes out for a moment, as her body simply shuts down from overstimulation and insufficient oxygen. The boys stop short, crazed arousal warring with concern as she falls limp in their arms. My heart also skips a beat. “Audrey!” I call out to her.

But then she immediately comes to, heaving and gulping for air. She flails her arms wildly. “No!… Don’t stop!!” she cries out, almost in hysterics. “I need… you guys… to cum… in… MEEEEEEE!!”

Instantly motivated again, the twins resume their pelvic assault with even more urgency, causing Audrey to cry out again. Evan’s arms wrap securely around Audrey’s torso, pulling her to him. Owen lunges to Audrey’s other tit and sucks on it lustily for a moment. Then he whines, almost pitifully, lets his head fall back, and reaches down to grab his brother by the ass. He pulls hard, trying to crush all three of their groins closer together, and jackhammers Audrey’s pussy. Evan squeals and redoubles his own efforts into her ass. The boys’ faces are strained masks of passion, as they rabbit thrust into my girl as hard and fast as they can, over and over again. The noises of intense preteen pleasure and the constant fleshy clapping together of adolescent skin dominate all other sounds on our private beach.

At this point, following her brief burst of energy, Audrey has allowed herself to become not much more than a rag doll. Her mouth is hanging open and her eyes half-lidded, her arms and head flopping around. Still, she manages to encourage the twins to keep going. “OhhhhhhhhhhAAAAAAAAA… AAAAaaaaaaaa!… YeeeaaaaaahhhhhAAAAAAAH!!…” she moans constantly.

Evan’s hand flies up off of Audrey’s chest up to her chin, cupping it and turning her face back towards him. He looks back and forth between her and his brother as he continues his frenetic humping. My camera lens is right there with them. “Enngh!! Enngh!! Enngh!! I’m so-… Enngh! So fu-… ENNGH!!… fucking… CLOSE, Dudes!!… ENNNNGH!!” he gasps.

“Enngh!! Enngh!! Me… Enngh!! ENNGH!!… M- ME TOO!!” Owen exclaims frantically, one of his hands reaching up to grab his twin by the back of the neck. Not slowing down his pelvis in the slightest, he then lunges up once again to inhale one of Audrey’s small tits. “MMFFF!! MMFFF!! MMFFF!!” I hear from him, his shrill grunts muffled by her chest.

I’m certain the boys are both about to experience absolutely earth-shattering orgasms, the sort that blows one’s mind, the kind guys don’t get to experience often enough in a lifetime. Lucky little bastards! Seeing and hearing how close they are has me remembering the intensity of that kind of cum, and I gasp as everything around my dick tightens up even more. Mother of fuck! I grit my teeth and try desperately to concentrate on my photography, to capture the kids’ wildly thrashing bodies, instead of thinking about how I could so easily relieve the excruciating tingling that is radiating all through my groin.

“Oh GOD! AAAAHHHH!!” cries Audrey. “DO it!!… AAAHHH… I’m… uurrggh… I’m, I’m… cumminnnnNNGGGHNNNAAA NOWWWWWW!!!!” she screams out.

“MMMFFF!! MMMFFF!!! MMMFFF!!!” cries Owen, his mouth around Audrey’s breast, his cock stabbing into her pussy violently, his pelvis slapping hers loudly.

“ENNGH!! ENNNNGH!! ENNNNGH!!” howls Evan in concert with his twin, his hips and prick slamming with resounding extra hard smacks into Audrey’s ass.

Audrey screeches again. “EEEEEEEEEEEEEE!!!!!”

“MMMMMGHGHGRRRRRRRR!!!!!!” growls Owen fiercely into her tit.

Evan roars at the same time. “AAAUUUUGGGGHHHHHAAAAA!!!!!”

And finally, the twins can take no more. Perfectly in step with one another, both of them completely lock-up, their bodies visibly shaking, wincing very loudly from the searing exertion they’re experiencing. They have shoved their cocks inside of Audrey as deep as they possibly can and are using every bit of their strength to somehow bury themselves even further.

“RRRRRRRRRGHGHGHGH!!” Through clenched teeth, something like a predatory snarl pours out forcefully from Audrey’s throat, followed by a lightning-fast gulp of breath and a powerful exclamation of “YyyyyyyeeeeeessssssaaaaaAAAAAGGHHHHHHHH!!!!!!!!”. An enormous orgasmic reaction no doubt from the twins’ quivering bodies clutching her tightly and from feeling those identical dicks kicking and twitching and jumping inside her. I picture those magnificent, rock-hard preteen cocks, spraying and filling Audrey’s young womb and bowels with every bit of potent juvenile sperm both of the boys can muster, filling her up exactly like she needs to be filled, like she DESERVES to be filled, right here in front of me! I cannot fucking imagine ANYTHING more erotic than this! My fucking GOD!

And this is the moment that I realize I’m done for. My vision loses focus, and my heart is pounding in my ears, but I’m barely aware of it because EVERYTHING is happening down below. It doesn’t matter if I want this or not. The ‘point of no return’ just blew through me with no warning. My brain can’t process anything clearly except for the sudden absolute certainty that I’m going to blow my load, and I can’t do anything about it except let it happen! And god damn, after all this, what a load this is going to be! I can tell it’s going to be a really, REALLY good one!

Some tiny bit of rational thought instructs my left hand to try to hold the camera body steady, and my right thumb to press the button on the camera that fully widens the zoom lens, and I hope that’s good enough to capture everything that these wonderful kids are experiencing as they ride out their orgasms. Because it looks like it’s my turn right now! I’m vaguely aware of the rough and guttural groan that is coming from my chest. After an entire morning of helping these beautiful children have better sex than they could have ever imagined, the pressure in my balls builds to an indescribable high.

And then the first fantastic involuntary muscle contraction hits, and it’s like time slows down. The first blast of semen is squeezed out of my ejaculatory duct, and I swear I can feel every exquisite millimeter as spunk is launched up inside the length of my achingly hard cock. The experience forces a delirious cry from my lungs just as the first blast of cum rockets out. For a split second, the muscles just beneath my dick relax enough to allow the duct to be packed full of semen again, and then again, they squeeze tight and catapult it out. I’m positive this payload is even larger, as the pressure within my cock all the way to the tip is even more intense. Third contraction. Just as amazing a feeling. But the fourth blast is the BIG one! I don’t know how much cum was squeezed from my body for this offering, but being forced to experience it being fired out is catastrophically pleasurable. I hear myself yell out in pain, a truncated “UNGH!!!!!”, probably as loud as I can. FUCK, this feels unbelievably awesome! After this, I lose count of the number of spurts: I know there are several more that slowly decrease in force but are superb nonetheless. With no hand being available to point it, my cock has been lurching uncontrollably with the flexing muscles, but I absolutely could not care less where my cum is landing. Jesus Christ, I can’t have been much older than these kids since the last time I orgasmed without touching myself! And I’m positive it never felt this good!

My other senses start to come back to me with the final small pumps of cum from my dick. I have indeed managed to keep the camera pointed at the kids. They have collapsed into a pile, Evan laying on Audrey, Audrey laying on Owen, all of them making cute gasping noises, breathing heavily, fighting for breath. My balls tingle, and my dick flexes with one last, slow contraction, and I sigh with happiness at the feeling and the beautiful sight before me. I’d like to just fall to the sand and bask in the afterglow of that incredible cum, but I have work to do. I struggle to get my legs muscles to work and shift to a crouch, still recording, and I will myself to overcome the wobbliness in my knees and begin to slowly circle the pile of preteen bodies.

I move past their heads, faces resting together as they struggle for enough air, seemingly oblivious to my presence. Then I pan down their sweat-covered, heaving bodies. They look like a delicious and sexy sandwich, Audrey as the ‘meat’ between the darker ‘bread’ of the boys. As I reach their feet, I zoom into their crotches, and the image on the camera screen is incredible. I quickly hit “stop” on the video recording, flip the camera mode to still photos, and snap away at images of both of Audrey’s holes, still stuffed balls deep. Wet globs of sticky fluids are seeping out from around the boys’ cocks, running down over their drained nutsacks and finally dribbling down to the sand between Owen’s legs. Amazing!

Completing my circle back to where I started, I note with amusement the lines of cum painted randomly across their bodies. My cum, obviously, and I take more photos of the evidence of the way I anointed their tripling. The kids either didn’t notice I jizzed all over them or simply didn’t care. I think they look spectacular this way, and I wish I could have hosed them down properly with a much heavier torrent of semen.

Soon Owen is groaning from the bottom of the pile. “You guys…” he complains tightly, “… you’re too… heavy on my chest… I can’t really breathe!”

“Fuck, sorry, Dude,” gasps Evan. Pushing up with his hands and knees on the sand, he and Audrey both groan reluctantly as his softening cock slips out from her ass. I take a great photo of a string of cum that stretches out from Evan’s dick to Audrey’s anus. The string snaps before Evan collapses to his butt on the sand on the opposite side from me.

Half the weight is gone, but I can tell Owen needs to be fully unburdened so he can get his breath back. “C’mon, Lil’ Bit. You need to get off him,” I tell her.

“Noooooooooo!” whines Audrey, still heaving, deadweight and her face cheek-to-cheek on Owen. “Don’t… wanna move!” Her eyes are closed, but the big smile on her face betrays any actual resistance. She moans as she lifts her face, turns her head lazily downward, and hums as her mouth comfortably melds with Owen’s. Then, after a long moment, she gently breaks the kiss, and her eyes flutter open a little. “Sure you want… me to move?” she asks at length, smirking.

Owen gives her a small apologetic grin. “Yeah, Dudette… you kinda have to,” he grunts, laboring. “I need… I can’t take… a deep breath…”

Understanding now that Owen is in legitimate discomfort, Audrey mumbles “sorry” and immediately pushes her chest up off of the boy. “Better?” she asks, watching as he finally draws a full lungful of air and exhales heavily. He smiles and gives her a wary nod.

Still straddling him, she groans out loud and gradually works herself the rest of the way up to a sitting position, letting the ocean breeze cool and dry off her sweaty skin. “Holy moly, you guys!” she exclaims tiredly, staring up into the sky. “That was so… so…” Her face splits into an enormous smile, “… so AWESOME! I’ve never felt anything so gooooooood! EVER!” She looks down again at Owen, then over to Evan, extending a relaxed hand to each of them. “You guys were both amazing!” she sighs happily.

The twins respond with identical shy smiles as they each take Audrey’s hands in one of theirs. “So were you,” they reply together. Then they give each other a look, smile shrewdly, and exchange a fast high-five, a fist bump, and a ‘bro’ shake, clearly a secret handshake routine they’ve shared for a long time. Audrey titters in delight as the boys chuckle, their arms relaxing but their hands remaining clasped comfortably together. It is very sweet to see the kids all holding hands in a circle like this, and I make sure to snap a few photos. They stay like this in silence for over a minute, exhausted and basking in the euphoric feelings in the aftermath of their lovemaking, appearing to be completely content. As they should be.

Glancing over at Evan beside her, Audrey grins as she notices the withered state of his penis. She releases his hand, and he hisses when she playfully reaches down and grasps the slimy, shriveled appendage. “Got you!” she giggles, refusing to let go as Evan writhes awkwardly with the ticklish sensations. Then she looks down at Owen and flexes her pelvic muscles, drawing an embarrassed noise from Owen. “And I squeezed you out!” she observes, stifling a laugh.

“Yeah, I know,” groans Owen, rolling his eyes. Then he gets a glint in his eye, lets go of Audrey’s hand, thrusts his thumb down between her legs, and starts rubbing her clit rapidly.

Audrey squeals loudly. “AHHH! Too sensitive! STOP!!” she shrieks, grappling with Owen’s wrist and laughing at their shared silliness.

“I think all of you have had enough for now. You’re pretty worn out,” I chuckle, enjoying taking a jab at the kids’ expense.

Evan snorts. “We’re not the only ones, Mister H!” he says while pointing at my lap.

I look down, and even though a long strand of cum remains suspended dripping from the tip, I have to admit that my own deflated cock is far from standing proud. I acknowledge the point with a sheepish shrug, and the kids all laugh.

When the laughter settles down, I quickly wipe my dick off, then I examine the screen of the camera in my hand. As I suspected, the video footage consumed almost all of the memory available on the card, so it’s a good thing I exchanged cameras before I started shooting. I reach over to my nearby bag to switch back to my primary and note that it’s only about half full. I start thinking about the clothing shoot we still have to complete today. There might be enough space left on it for the entire shoot, but probably not. I’ll empty it back at the cabin when we get lunch in a bit.

Still, there’s plenty of space for a bunch more still photos right now, and I get a new idea. I look over at the kids, who are just now helping each other get to their feet, and I see Evan and Owen have gone completely flaccid, their dicks now just soft little worms hanging off their fit young bodies. Now that they’re all fucked out, I ask them if they’re in the mood to change things up and do some ‘innocent’ nude photos suitable for my Pyntar clients, and I’m overjoyed that all three of them are enthusiastic about it.

I have them go for a swim in the ocean before we start, if for no other reason than to wash away the sticky fluids all over them. Once they’re cleaned off, I give them some direction, but mostly I just suggest they improvise and have normal fun together. And it works beautifully! Having satiated their lust (at least for the time being), they just have a blast on the beach. I get amazing relaxed and active shots of the kids in all their naked splendor, both in the water and on the beach. I ask them to strike a few specific poses together, but mostly I just capture various candid moments that happen naturally between them. Whether they are chasing each other around on land, splashing and dunking each other in the waves, standing arm in arm while dripping wet on shore, or caked in sand from head to toe after a spontaneous three-way wrestling match, the children look fantastic! I shoot hundreds upon hundreds of photos, and nearly an hour goes by like it’s nothing. The impression I want the images to show is that they are close young nudist friends, having no reason to be ashamed for simply having fun at the beach. And that is exactly how they are in this moment, now that their sexual energy isn’t so high. The twins’ cocks do stiffen again somewhat after a time, but following three orgasms in one brief morning, their bodies tell them they’ve had enough hanky-panky for now, so Evan and Owen don’t start acting naughty. Still, the partial erections make the photos even more alluring. I can’t wait to see what the images look like printed! All four of us are thoroughly enjoying ourselves, and we only stop because my camera alerts me that there is no storage left. We agree we need to head back to the cabin to get something to eat, regardless.

After spending the better part of two hours so free and open on our secluded beach, I’m not looking forward to having to venture back into public space again. I find the tiny pieces of Audrey’s bikini, both the boys’ Speedos and my baggy swimsuit, and shake out the sand. I join them for one last dip in the ocean to wash ourselves off and allow the sun and wind to dry our skin for a few minutes before I yell to everyone to come and get dressed. The boys suggest we wait until the last minute, that we can all pull on our suits when we get to the edge of the trees at the main beach, and Audrey agrees. I chuckle at my little nudist convert, but I see no harm in staying naked a couple of minutes longer, so for the time being, I toss the bathing suits into the large bag with the beach toys and towels. Picking through the foliage without anything protecting my bits feels a tad odd, and the kids plow through ahead of me. Only it seems they had ulterior motives because when they get to where the trees part, they don’t stop. Instead, they give each other conspiratorial glances, grin over their shoulders at me, then giggle hysterically as they break into the open at a dead run, streaking naked down the main beach back to our cabin. I call out to them to stop, but they ignore me. Oh, for god’s sake! Before stepping out and exposing myself as well, I search the large beach, and thankfully I don’t see anyone between us and our cabin. Still, there are some beachgoers beyond who might notice the three nude preteen children that are running in their direction. I decide that it wouldn’t be wise if they also saw a naked adult man chasing them, so I stop to fish out my shorts and pull them on before I jog after the kids. I chuckle when I catch up to them at the door, as they had forgotten that the cabin is locked, and they are now trying to look inconspicuous, hanging around outside without any clothes on. I make a show of not being able to find the key in the bag, and they’re in the process of squealing at me to hurry when I take pity on them, produce the key, and we all dash inside.

I tell them to relax while I look to see what we have to eat, and naturally, they don’t bother getting dressed. Of course not. And I’m certainly not complaining, as I get to continue drinking in the sight of their perfect pubescent bodies while I make some sandwiches. As we eat, I remind them that we still have work to do. We have to get back to photographing the catalog clothes as soon as we finish lunch. The kids half-heartedly whine about it, but they know the work is the ‘real’ reason we’re all here, and they begrudgingly accept it. And their attitudes improve when I explain that the sooner we can get through the shoot, the more time we’ll have for fun before the twins’ parents return.

After the kids take quick showers and tidy up their hair, we sit back outside with the boxes of clothing and get to work. The amazing explorations of the morning seem to have no distraction on them for the rest of the afternoon. We spend four productive hours modeling and photographing clothes out on the beach and beneath the canopy of nearby tropical trees. Being so comfortable with their bodies means they waste very little time. They don’t even blink as they change outfits down to their underwear without hesitation right out in the open. As a result, we finish three entire lines of clothing just before I lose the light. I proudly tell all three of them that thanks to their focus and work ethic, we got more accomplished today than I expected. We’ll only have a short schedule tomorrow, and then we’ll have a bunch more spare time. I’m impressed by how mature and professional they can be when the situation calls for it.

As darkness falls, we take a local cab into the nearby town to eat at a seaside cafe, followed by a stroll on the town’s boardwalk to see what there is to see. I’m amazed at how the kids are handling their new circumstances. None of them seem jealous or possessive of any of the others, nor are they pawing at each other in a huge public display of age-inappropriate affection. They just seem like happy preteen best friends, laughing and making jokes, recalling funny Internet memes, and making sassy comments about people and things around them on the Caribbean island. The only outward sign of their intimacy is the ease with which they comfortably touch each other, but even then, they aren’t being overly flirty. I see the occasional local or tourist glance at the kids and me, some clearly curious about why these three precocious and attractive kids, one of whom is obviously not related to the other two, are all in the care of a young guy who doesn’t really look like he could be a father to any of them. I smile to myself, figuring that even the most perverted guess from any of these passersby still likely wouldn’t come close to the reality.

It’s getting late, though. and we need to head back. So I corral the kids into another cab, and we’re back at the cabin in short order.

“Listen up, guys,” I say as we enter through the front door. “I think the colors of the next set of clothes will really pop if they’re lit by a morning sunrise. To do that, we need to get up early tomorrow morning, so we should start getting ready now to go to bed early tonight.” I look around at all three of the kids. “Are we good?”

Audrey looks disappointed for a moment, then covers it up and looks at the twins. The boys shrug. “Okay, Mister H,” they reply obediently in unison.

“Good,” I say. “Who’s getting ready for bed first?”

Audrey half-heartedly waves. “I’ll go,” she volunteers, heading to the bathroom.

Evan and Owen help me tidy up the kitchen from lunch while we wait. When Audrey calls out that she’s done, one of the twins says he’ll take his turn, and he leaves the room. Several minutes later, the other twin with me (which one is this?) is informed by his brother that the facilities are available. The boy excuses himself and bolts, leaving me alone to finish washing the dishes.

I’m just finished hanging up the dish towel and heading towards the bedrooms when the bathroom door swings open beside me. Evan steps out. I know it’s Evan because he’s naked again, and his birthmark gives him away. “S’cuse me, Mister H,” he says casually, stepping past me with his clothes in his arm and nonchalantly pads back toward the bedroom he shares with his brother. I silently admire his ass again for a moment before he disappears through the bedroom door, then I figure I’d better use the bathroom while it’s free.

After I’ve brushed my teeth and am taking care of my other business, it occurs to me that it would be dumb to pull up my clothes again so soon before bed and when I obviously have nothing left to hide from the kids, so I finish undressing entirely while I sit on the toilet. After I finish, I wash my hands and bundle up all my clothes under my arm, as Evan had just done. As I’m reaching for the door handle, I stifle a yawn. It’s been a long day. If I’m tired, I have to assume the kids are even more so. I’ll check in with the boys in their room, and then Audrey and I will settle in. We’ll probably all get to sleep pretty quickly.

But when I go to peek into the boys’ room to say goodnight, it’s empty. Well, not quite empty, as I do see two piles of clothes that have been recently dumped on the nearest bed. Hmmm…

Back to my room, and as expected, the bed is littered with three naked children who are grinning at me expectantly. Audrey is in the middle, relaxed and stretched out on her back, arms behind her head and her ankles crossed. While one of the twins is lying on his stomach facing me, the other is sitting cross-legged, making it easy for me to identify him as Owen. It’s also easy to identify that he’s hard. I try to put on a stern face. “What happened to everyone agreeing on going to sleep?” I demand.

“Actually,” Evan says sarcastically, raising his hand like a little smartass, “you didn’t say anything about sleep! You just said we needed to go to bed!”

Owen duplicates his brother’s cocky attitude. “And you didn’t say WHOSE bed to go to!”

My attempt at stoicism crumbles, and I shake my head chuckling. “So I’m guessing you three horndogs want to fuck around a little before sleeping?”

The boys grin and blush at my directness. Audrey tries to be suave. She uncrosses her ankles and spreads her legs. “Don’t you?” she murmurs suggestively as she runs a finger up her hairless vulva. Damn! She bites her lower lip to try to continue the seductive routine, even as I see her struggle to not start giggling.

I make a show of sighing in exasperation, but of course, I give in. It would look pretty stupid if I didn’t because I can tell without looking that I’m pretty much fully erect at this point. But I still have a ‘responsible’ side. I sit down on the side of the bed. “All right, but we’re not staying up nearly as late as last night. I’ll let you get your rocks off, then you get to sleep. We still have to get up early. Okay?”

The kids all enthusiastically nod. “What are we gonna do?” asks Owen to the other two, then looking at me.

“Whatever you want, as long as it’s quick,” I reply.

“Don’t think that’ll be a problem,” mumbles Evan, reaching underneath to straighten himself and triggering a deep intake of breath. Owen shifts a little, a hand gripping at the inside of his thigh, close to but not touching his stiff dick.

“I have an idea!” cries Audrey. “Let’s make a race out of this tonight! Winner between us three gets to decide what we do in our spare time tomorrow.” She looks at me for approval. I raise my eyebrows and shrug. Sounds fine to me!

Evan rolls over to his side. “What kind of race?”

“Fastest to cum wins!” shouts Owen, drawing a laugh from Evan.

“No fair!” retorts Audrey. “You guys could cum way faster right now than I can!”

“Okay then,” says Evan, warming to the idea. “How about the winner is the one who can make someone ELSE cum the fastest!” Owen’s eyes get big, liking this suggestion.

Audrey smirks knowingly at the boys. “Can you guys REALLY hold off cumming, if you wanted to?”

Evan can’t quite hide a sheepish expression and turns to Owen, who smiles guiltily. “We can TRY, can’t we?” Owen snickers.

Then Audrey’s face lights up. “Wait! I know a perfect way to even things up! So that we’re all doing the same thing! We have…” She pauses for effect before continuing. What a drama queen! “… a BLOWJOB CONTEST!”

Both boys’ eyes get real big. “Blowjob contest?” they repeat, looking at each other.

“Yeah!” replies Audrey excitedly. “You guys do each other…” she says as she waggles her finger back and forth between the boys, then she turns to point triumphantly at me, “… and I do YOU!”

As flattered as I am to be included in this contest, I’m more curious about what’s going on with the twins. Neither one of them looks scared or upset. It’s more like they’re terribly uncertain. “You guys okay with that?” I ask them.

“Uhhhhh… yeah!” says Evan awkwardly, glancing briefly at his brother. “It’s just… like, we’ve… we’ve never…”

“… sucked each other’s dick before!” completes Owen, blushing again.

“Or ANY dick before,” adds Evan.

Audrey smiles broadly. “That’s why this is perfect! If you wanna win this, both of you guys have gotta get real good at it, real fast, while also trying not to cum! You’ll both last longer.”

The boys look at each other, their attention drawn down to each other’s hard cocks, each one imagining what their brother’s tool will feel like inside their mouth. Then their eyes lock again. Owen gulps, Evan shrugs questioningly, and Owen turns to Audrey. “You want us to… you know…”

“… swallow?” finishes Evan.

“Oh yeah!” she exclaims. “You never tasted your own before?” Both boys shake their heads. She grins. “I bet you’re gonna like it! But yeah, if you wanna win, you gotta swallow it all!” Evan and Owen look at each other again, raise their eyebrows in silent negotiation, then finally nod in agreement. Looks like they’re in! Audrey squeals in delight.

I clear my throat. “All right, you!” I tell Audrey. “Just because you want to win doesn’t mean you’re not going to have to win fair and square. I’m not going to cum for you, just like that!”

Audrey attempts to give me a sexy smile. “You sure?” she growls playfully, patting the mattress up by the headboard for me. I climb onto the bed, rolling my eyes, and she titters.

While I make myself comfortable sitting with my back up against the head of the bed and my knees spread wide, the twins are trying to situate themselves. “Who gets to be on top?” Owen mutters as he lays down across the foot of the mattress, his head facing the opposite direction to his brother.

“Or is it better to be on the bottom?” muses Evan.

“No cheating! Both of you need to be the same!” cries Audrey over her shoulder as she tries to squeeze in between my lap and the twins. “You both have to lay on your sides. Okay?”

“Okay,” they reply. The mattress squeaks as the kids rub against each other, trying to find enough room to get in position. Audrey is crouched tight in front of me, her feet and butt bumping up on the lower back of one of the twins, who are sideways and right at the bottom edge. I mean, if it were up to me, I’d have just had the boys take the left side of the bed, and Audrey and I could take the right, but I guess that’s just me. I chuckle to myself as I wonder how long it’ll take for the kids to come to the same conclusion.

As Audrey grasps the base of my (alert and ready) cock with her thumb and index finger, I look over her butt to the boys. Facing one another’s crotches, they’ve both moved their left legs forward, each providing his brother a pillow for his head as they stare at the erect columns of flesh in front of their faces. Their right knees are raised in the air, opening themselves up completely for each other. Their arms are wrapped around each other’s waists and thighs, ready to grip a butt cheek in each hand. I see them breathing pretty hard already, and they look damn excited about this. They may not quite know what they’re doing yet, but they’re very eager to keep learning! “You two ready?” I ask.

“Yeah!” they say back in unison, their voices a little shaky.

“I’m ready, too!” Audrey says sweetly. I feel her breath on my cock, her lips hovering a fraction of an inch from the tip.

I don’t think we need to wait any longer. “Okay then! Go!” I tell them. About four inches of my dick is instantly engulfed by Audrey’s small, warm mouth. And a few feet further away, the young twins try to inhale each other’s cocks. Both of these events make me very happy, indeed!

Audrey, as I noted this morning, is pretty good at the art of fellatio already, although naturally, she struggles a bit more with my adult member when compared to how she handled the twins. But this isn’t her first rodeo with mine, and she knows how to compensate with her fist, stroking and twisting her hand up to her lips and right down to the base in rhythm with her mouth. Fuck! I make a concerted effort to not flex the muscles in my pelvis. As much as I would love to just feed her all my cum as fast as possible, that’s not the game the kids are playing here. I have to try to hold off.

Looking away from Audrey to the boys isn’t helping much in my effort to hold back. Both of them are going at it, hard! The boy closer to Audrey and me, with his back to us (I don’t know which one is which any longer), has his arms wrapped tightly around his brother’s ass. He is bobbing his head quite quickly and is showing an impressive ability to take the entire length of the hard cock into his mouth. With every lunge of his neck forward, his nose bumps against his brother’s ballsack. Jesus, that’s hot! I mean, it’s not like the dick is huge, but the tip has to be thrusting past his tonsils. He must not have a very strong gag reflex. Looking to the other side, I can’t see as much because of the closer twin’s butt, but it appears that both brothers are equally adept at and enthusiastic about this. But then… of course, they are!

They look to be doing so well at sucking dick that I think they’ve forgotten the purpose of this contest, which is to be first to coerce an orgasm, not to have one. Instead, I note with amusement that both of their pelvises are thrusting vigorously and their bodies are squirming in time with their brother’s head bobbing and that they are moaning and grunting with rapidly accelerating arousal. I’m not sure they care at all about the game any longer.

And it seems Audrey has figured this out, as well. Even if she can’t see what’s going on behind her, their movements and noises give it away. She pulls her mouth off my cock with a wet ‘pop’, scrambles up closer to me, turns around, and plops her butt down between my legs. “I’m not gonna win anymore, anyways. Now I just wanna watch!” she gasps, leaning back and pinning my dick back against my stomach and practically sitting on my balls. As much as I agree with the sentiment of watching the twins, she’s not going to just abuse my junk like this. She makes a high-pitched yelp as I lift her up by under her armpits, let my penis drop down below her, mostly close up my thighs, then set her back down on my lap. I don’t have quite enough space in front of me to fully straighten my legs, so Audrey gets comfortable with her slim legs straddled outside my knees. She wiggles in place, and the top of my shaft nestles wonderfully against her wet sex. I hug her close with my hands on her little tits and her stomach, then I hook my chin over her shoulder and nuzzle her ear, settling in to watch the show with her.

This show is not going to have a very long runtime, I’m afraid to say. In the moments since I was distracted by Audrey, I notice that both of the boys have started prodding into their brother’s butt hole with a finger. Judging by the increase in volume and tempo of their sucking and groaning, I’d say they both like this a lot! There’s no pretense any longer to trying to hold back, as each boy is now robustly fucking his brother’s mouth. I really should’ve had my camera for this!

God, these boys are hot! If the naked girl in my arms wasn’t enough to get me horny, young twin boys in an aggressive sixty-nine certainly will! My hips flex in sympathetic rhythm with Evan and Owen, my dick sawing forward and backward along Audrey’s dripping pussy lips. She’s gasping and squirming in my arms, with both of her hands diving down between her legs, using one to fondle the tip of my pumping cock and the other to start rubbing her clit rapidly. I push that hand aside and take over diddling duty, and pinch her sensitive nipples with my other hand. We moan and squirm together, neither of us taking our eyes off the identical writhing bodies in front of us.

Only a few moments later, the twins’ staccato moans become urgent muffled squeals, longer and higher pitched. Their hips jerk harder than ever. And then, there are two short and loud shrieks. I can see the boys both gamely and lustfully continuing to suck, interrupted only by choked gasps for breath and hurried swallowing. Leave it to the twins to finish off in each other’s mouths at pretty much the same instant. God damn, they are so lucky to have each other, and I’m fortunate to be here to help them along! All too quickly, the boys let each other’s cocks slip from their mouths, panting heavily while holding on to one another in a sweaty heap.

That appears to be Audrey’s cue. Pulling up against my embrace, she leans to her left and swings her right foot backward, then does the same on the opposite side so that now she is straight up on her knees, straddling over my thighs. Turning her head back toward me, I see her excited and aroused expression as she pushes her ass back into my stomach and leans forward. With no more preliminaries, she peers down between her legs, grasps my stiff member, and lines herself up. I feel my cock head split her pussy open, and she moans sexily, slowly impaling herself all the way down in one smooth motion. Jesus, this may only be the second time I’ve ever been inside her, but I’m never going to tire of the way her pussy hugs my dick so tight, like a hot and slick velvet sleeve! SO good!

As soon as she bottoms herself out, she melts back into my embrace, cranes her neck back and to the side, and kisses me, releasing a deeply satisfied moan into my mouth. I kiss her back passionately. I really am in love with this wonderful girl, and I’m so lucky that she loves me back. Part of us loving each other is that we get to explore all this pleasure together, and I figure it’s time we do some more exploring! I tighten my hold around her torso, break the kiss, and look deeply into her eyes as I lift her body up about five inches. With just the tip of my cock still lodged in her pussy, I hold her gaze for a moment before I let her drop back down while I thrust my hips up. She grunts with a loud “OOOAAAHH!” as I penetrate deep inside her, my pelvis impacting on her butt with a solid clap. Another lift, another drop, another loud groan. The expression on her face, the noises she’s making, there is no doubt she is loving this. It all feels pretty fucking nice for me, as well! I speed up and get into a steady rhythm, using my arms to pump her entire body up and down onto my thrusting cock. She lets her head fall back, panting as the perfect skin on her cheek rubs up against the stubbly side of my face. Her hands fall down to grab onto my hips, and she starts helping me, pulling herself down even harder with each upward drive of my pelvis. I feel her pussy muscles squeezing me each time my balls smack up between her smooth inner thighs. Holy christ! This beautiful, wonderful girl of mine only lost her virginity just yesterday and is already such a great little fuck!

She’s so good, in fact, that I feel at this pace I’m already pretty damn close to nutting inside her. As much as my animal instinct propels me to keep going to that sweet release as soon as possible, I can’t do that, not yet anyway. Yeah, I said this was all going to be quick so the kids can get to sleep, but Audrey needs to get off first before I blow my load. I stop flexing my hips and slow my arms down, lifting her up and down onto my cock at a more leisurely pace for now. She allows me to lovingly manhandle her, moaning, “Ohhaahhh!!” with each downward plunge.

I smile contentedly, happy to be bringing her all these pleasures and resolving to bring her even more. I shift my grip on her body, lifting my palm on my higher hand to squeeze the nipple on one of her small tits and sliding my lower hand down to rub my pinky finger into her moist slit and over her little clit. Audrey’s whole body stiffens, and she cries out loudly with the attack of my fingertips. Her eyes are closed, and her mouth hangs open, moaning and gasping with growing passion in time with me raising and lowering her on my pole. I increase the pressure on the button between her legs and squeeze her nipple just a little harder, causing her to twitch almost violently. “HNNNNNNGGGGGHHH!!!!” she growls, followed by desperate-sounding panting of “Hwoaah! Hwoaaah! HwoaaAHH! HWOAAAHH!!”. Oh yeah, she’s close now! I increase my fuck and finger tempo a bit to help her along.

It only takes a few more seconds before she gets there. Her body quivers so hard I have to embrace her even more securely to myself as I continue fucking her. The feel of her perfectly smooth, sweaty skin rubbing on my chest and thighs, the smell of her, is driving me crazy. “AwwwwwaaaaAAAAAAAAGGHHH!!” she cries out in ecstasy. Her orgasmic groans can’t drown out the wet noises of my straining penis, pistoning in and out of her. I feel her preteen pussy bathe my shaft with her warm juices as it clamps down hard, making each thrust into her slicker, hotter, and tighter than ever on my hypersensitive dick. Oh fucking Jesus, this is the best feeling ever! No need to hold back now. I start plunging into her with long, powerful strokes of my cock. As she continues to moan out loudly through her prolonged climax, I sprint toward my own finish line, making guttural grunts and slamming her body down onto my pounding pole over and over, absolutely NEEDING to pack her little womb with my seed.

Just as I’m starting to get really close, suddenly Audrey pushes up with her legs, like she’s trying to get up off of me. My caveman brain isn’t very interested in interrupting my journey to orgasm, so without thinking, I squeeze her chest and stomach harder and shove her back down, impaling her again. I hold her there and thrust into her several more times, the tickle in my balls really stirring, before I finally clue in that she’s calling out, trying to tell me something. “Scott!” she cries out. “Stop! Please!”

Oh shit! I freeze, my dick fully penetrated into her. For a split second, I recoil in terror with the thought that I’m forcing myself on her against her will! Am I… raping her?

But thankfully, Audrey immediately lets me know that there is a much less terrible reason for wanting me to stop at this moment. She turns her head to me, gasping and sweating. “Do it… in my bum now, Scott!” she tells me breathlessly. “I’m ready!”

I’m seriously unprepared for the wild swings of my internal emotions. In just a few seconds, I went from super-horny to bitter self-loathing and now insanely horny again. “What?!” I reply incredulously.

“Owen and Evan… they helped me push… a bunch of that oil… up my bum! While you… were in the bathroom before!” Audrey pants hard, the aftermath of her cum still leaving her short of breath. I quickly glance at the boys, having almost forgotten they were there. They’re grinning and nodding while sitting at the foot of the bed, breathing hard, and pressed together side by side while idly jerking each other off as they watch us. “And since they fucked me… up the bum this morning… I know I can take you now… I KNOW it!” Audrey babbles hurriedly. “I wanna try it!… PLEASE, Scott!”

I won’t lie. I’m probably not thinking entirely straight right now. Because the voice of that caveman inside me is completely convinced that fucking Audrey in the ass right now is a goddamn EXCELLENT idea! What the hell… let’s do this!

I loosen my hold, and Audrey pushes herself up, my turgid cock covered with her juices as it pops free with a faint slurp from her snug pussy. She doesn’t hesitate, not for an instant. She straightens her back and reclines completely into my chest and stomach, rolling her hips forward to line herself up and press the glans of my dick onto her rear entrance. My hands around her body feel her lower abdominal muscles flex, and through the tip of my circumcised cock I feel her asshole opening up.

A tiny measure of concern swells up within me, worried about Audrey’s ability to take my dick. “Take it slow,” I murmur unsteadily into her ear.

“Uh-huh!” she whispers back. Then she takes a deep breath, braces herself, and bears down. The next thing I know, Audrey’s body drops about an inch, and at the same time, my cock signals to me that its head just squeezed through her sphincter. Jesus, she’s tight! Both of us flinch, and for the first time, I think to consider if this actually was a good idea. Is she really stretched out enough? Did she and the boys prepare her hole with enough lube?

Audrey isn’t giving me any more time to mull this over. “UUUUUUUHGHGHGH!!” she groans as she pushes her knees out further away from my legs, the weight of her body forcing her to slide down over my shaft. I feel the intense pinch of the tight ring of muscle traveling down toward the base of my cock, as well as the steaming and slippery heat of her anus enveloping it. My GOD! Incredibly, she doesn’t stop until her soft butt cheeks squish into my pelvis, and there is no more of me left that can invade her. I’m repeating myself, but JESUS, she’s TIGHT! But all kidding aside, she also feels phenomenal!

“WHHHHHHHHHOOAA!!” she blurts out as she empties her lungs. “It’s SOOOO big!”

Never in my life have my hips wanted to thrust more than this moment, but I have to hold off. “You okay, Lil’ Bit?” I mutter shakily into the nape of her neck, my eyes closed, holding her comfortingly.

“I… think so!” Audrey gasps back. “But I think… I might need some help… like this morning!”

Help? What kind of help is she talking about? But before I can ask, I sense the mattress springs shift and feel movement at my feet and shins. I peer around Audrey’s head, and I’m amused to see that she has hurriedly gestured for the twins to come closer. They instantly oblige her, with Evan (thank you, birthmark!) immediately straddling my left thigh while Owen perches on my right, arms around each others’ backs for balance. Both of them are erect again and eager to assist. Audrey shoves her palms under her small underdeveloped breasts and pushes them up. “Suck on them again?” she whines to the boys. “Please?”

“Sure thing!” replies Owen enthusiastically, grinning wider and leaning forward.

Evan is equally happy to please. “No problem, Dudette!” he adds cheekily as he dives in.

Each of the boys latches onto a nipple and goes straight to work. “AwwwwwwWWWWW!!” Audrey wails, taking hold of both of their heads and holding them tight to her chest. Each of them wraps their free arm around her in return, snaking between her back and my stomach as they suckle away, humming happily. My arms are still folded around Audrey’s midsection, so I might as well ‘help’ her as well. I slide my hand back down to her crotch and immediately start rubbing side-to-side vigorously on her sopping clit with the pads of my index and middle fingers, which only amps up Audrey more. She groans out louder, her body shudders, and the muscles in her rectum clamp down on my cock.

You’ll forgive my hips at this point if they’ve given up on remaining inactive. I use my arms to keep her down and flex up into her, then relax for a split second before pushing again. Hard! With the boys on my legs and leaning heavily onto us, I don’t have the free range of motion I had before in her pussy, but that’s okay. I hammer Audrey with short thrusts as fast as I can hit her with. “AHH AHH AHH AHH!” she cries out deliriously as I bounce her on my lap rapidly.

My leg muscles are spasming quickly, having the same effect of bouncing the twins on my thighs. All three kids are being given a wild ride. Evan and Owen are moaning “Mmmph! Mmmph!” into Audrey’s chest with increasing intensity, humping on my legs at the same speed that I pound away into Audrey’s ass.

It doesn’t take long to again feel the eruption approaching. Every piece of my anatomy anywhere close to my balls is getting deliciously tight. I free my arms from around Audrey and wrap them around all three kids, hold them securely, and really let my hips go to town. My cock saws rapidly in and out of Audrey’s tight ass, and it’s being squeezed perfectly. Oh yeah, that’s it! I grit my teeth and keep going. Here it comes, no stopping it now!

Another half dozen hard, longer thrusts, and I’m there! I can’t breathe for several seconds as the suspense builds to a dizzying climax. And then the air bursts from my lungs as I feel the first volley of semen explode from my cock. It’s all I can do to clutch tight to all of the smooth, squirming naked flesh in my arms as I empty my balls into my little Audrey, shot after shot filling up her hot ass. Oh my fucking GOD, THIS IS SO GOOD!

My head is swimming as the intensity of the orgasm inevitably starts to diminish. I’m luxuriating in the last few throbs of my dick inside Audrey’s tight sleeve as I become aware that the boy on my left thigh has stopped his frantic humping. Evan’s body is shivering, and he’s pressing his pelvis hard toward Audrey, his disjointed gasps for breath turning into a squeal. “HNNNNNNNNNHHGG!!!!” Holy shit, the kid is cumming again! And now so is Owen, as he duplicates his brother’s quivers and noises. Jeez, that was quick!

I don’t feel anything new splattering on my skin, so whatever sperm the boys have got left in the tank must be hitting Audrey right on her pussy. “Ahhhhuuuggh Gahahahahhhd!” she cries, and I can tell she’s oh so close to another peak and needs a hand. I pull back one of my arms and thrust it back down between the kids to Audrey’s crotch. Sure enough, a light coating of warm and slimy fluid is being squirted onto her smooth mound and lips. I smear my fingers through it and cram them into her slit, resuming my rough fingering on her clit aided by the additional slipperiness of the boys’ jizz.

Audrey makes a wincing noise louder than I’ve ever heard. “EEENNNNNNNNGHGHGHGH!!” Her body trembles, and her back arches severely, jamming the back of her head into the crook of my neck.

Oh yeah, there you go, girl! Using the twins’ spunk on my fingers to massage her pussy through another huge orgasm is the perfect way to end this. It makes me feel so good that she can experience so much pleasure. “I love it so much that we can do this to you,” I murmur into her ear. I think she growls and shakes even harder when I tell her this!

After prolonging her ecstasy for several more seconds with my fingers, I pull my hand back out and allow her to come down. She collapses back down onto my chest, heaving for breath like she was drowning. The twins are panting heavily as well, having pushed themselves hard to cum again so quickly after finishing blowing each other only about ten minutes ago.

I feel myself smiling as a euphoria of contentment washes over me. Here I am, with three naked kids on my lap, all of them exhausted but extremely happy and satisfied. The boys are incredibly endearing, and I’m very lucky they’ve come into my life. And my freshly-drained cock is still embedded deep in the butt of the best girl in the world! How could I NOT feel content at this moment? The feeling of gratification is overwhelming and makes me just want to hug the kids close to me and go to sleep. They must be feeling the same.

“So…” I finally sigh, “… you guys HAVE to be ready to go to sleep now, right?”

“Uh-huh!” Audrey grunts back weakly, eyes still closed and a faint smile on her face. The twins nod tiredly in sheepish agreement.

I gently wrap my arms around Audrey’s skinny torso. Now that she’s completely relaxed, I lift her easily off of me, my softening dick slipping out of her well-used butthole. I immediately feel my cum dribbling out of her onto my lap. It reminds me of the slimy mess that must also be on and in her pussy right now. I reluctantly think about how sticky it’s going to be if we don’t wipe ourselves. “We’re a bit of a mess here,” I mutter to Audrey. “You want to clean up?”

“Nooooooooo,” she moans back, eyes closed and her body completely limp in my arms. “I don’t caaaaaare!”

I don’t really care either. Good enough for me, then! I motion wearily with a tilt of my head to the twins toward the right side of the bed. “If you guys want to sleep here, take that side.”

“Okay,” they mumble agreeably. Owen and Evan slide themselves clumsily off my thighs, allowing me to keep Audrey in my lap and scootch over the other way, making room for all of us. It’s a little cooler than last night in the cabin, so the boys and I manage to pull the light blanket out from under our butts so that we can push it down.

I position myself near the outside edge of the mattress and carefully lay Audrey’s flaccid body down beside me, between myself and the boys. Before I can reach down to pull the blanket back up over us, the twins both lean over Audrey to hug me, their chins resting on my shoulders on either side of my head. “G’night, Mister H,” they mutter happily.

“Goodnight, guys,” I say softly, smiling as I hug them back. I can’t help but continue smiling as they take turns leaning down to hug and sweetly kiss Audrey goodnight. She hums drowsily as she returns the cute pecks on the lips. Then the twins settle in and cover themselves up, snuggling in with each other. I hear a soft smack of a kiss on the lips, a muffled “Love you, Dude,” followed by a slurred “Love you too. Night, Dude.” And then silence. I think they fell asleep just like that. I chuckle softly.

Switching off the lamp beside the bed plunges the room into darkness. I pull the other half of the blanket up, this time over myself and Audrey. I ease my arm under her head, and she sleepily nestles into my chest as I tuck us in. She’s so adorable and beautiful! Her naked skin feels wonderful against me, even if we’re a bit sticky, and as I pull her gently to my body, she makes tiny cute noises. I kiss the top of her head. “I love you, Lil’ Bit,” I mutter into her hair.

“Love you, too,” she hums back, so faint I barely can make out the words. “G’night.”

“Night,” I whisper. Like the boys, she’s basically out like a light a few seconds later.

For a long moment, I lay perfectly still. I feel the light puffs of Audrey’s breath on my pecs, the smoothness of her leg draped over my thigh. I listen to the light snores from the boys next to us. My eyes are adjusting to the dim light, the reflections of moonlight off the water letting me examine the faces of Audrey and the twins. My heart lurches a little as I think about how much all of them mean to me. Everything about these kids is so perfect!

I know that virtually everyone in the world would condemn me for what I’m doing here with these children. And I get that. If I were on the outside, just looking at what I’ve done and have allowed to happen here, I’m sure I’d be just as judgemental. But despite this, I know in my heart that for us, this isn’t wrong. Audrey, Evan, and Owen may be young, but they have been completely consenting participants in what we’ve done together, and they aren’t doing anything they don’t want to be doing. These children definitely don’t have to be eighteen to explore and enjoy their sexuality. I know I never felt ‘abused’ by what Glenn and I did together back in my own childhood, and I honestly don’t see any reason why the twins or Audrey will feel any different.

And I’d never hurt them. Particularly Audrey. I mean, I love the boys too, but the love I feel for her is different. Audrey is… MINE! I really do love her!

I gently kiss her head again, content in knowing that I’m in the most wonderful situation I can possibly imagine. I’ve never felt so lucky and content. I produce an enormous yawn, as the events of this perfect day have taken a fantastic toll on me. That orgasm fired off the sleepy hormones, and now I don’t want to fight the fatigue. I am happy and satisfied. And though I want to see what is in store for us tomorrow and the days to come, for now, I’m going to thoroughly enjoy this sleep!

Best… day… ever…

Copyright 2022 – Edward-or-Ford
All rights reserved

Dolor textus in fine fabulae quempiam scripsit, est aliquantulus fatum. Sed bonum officium Ed

Here’s the download link to this chapter’s audio file: Link

But I recommend downloading the complete audio file (.m4a, .m4b or .MP3) for the best experience. There’s also an eBook in both the ePub and PDF format available for download here.
Click here to go to the Audio book/eBook page

I did some minor editing on E-o-F’s version. Mostly to match styles. Think in the line of: E-oF: ‘Audrey is … Mine.’ Jason: ‘Audrey is… MINE!’ Small, hardly noticeable changes, but changes nevertheless. So that’s why you can take a look at the unedited version HERE.

La Isla de Aquinas – Chapter 15

Chapter 15 – Shoot them

“Where did you find this place?” Miranda says as we enter our cabin on the beach.

“This is fucking awesome!” I hear one of the twins say behind me.

“LANGUAGE!” both Miranda and Luke say at the same time.

“But… can’t you see where we are?” the boy persisted.

“I don’t care,” Luke says, “We don’t talk like that, and you know it, Evan!”

“I’m sorry,” Evan replies, but his ear-to-ear smile can’t be missed when I glance over.

Holding back a chuckle, I decide to address the elephant in the room. “There are only two bedrooms, so I assume Audrey and I take the one with the single Queen-sized bed, and you take the one with the two beds?”

“That’ll be great. Yeah. You okay with that too, boys?” Luke asks as he looks at the twins.

“I don’t care,” Owen says, “We’re mostly out on the beach anyways.”

“That’s true,” I add, “I wanna start early tomorrow. I think that’s when we’ll have the best light for the non-swimwear clothes.”

“Sounds good,” Miranda chips in, “How about we find us a restaurant and eat? It’s almost dinner time, and it’s our treat.”

“Thanks, Miranda. But there’s no need. I’d be happy to pay for Audrey and me.”

“Don’t be silly! You arranged it all, so buying dinner is the least we can do!”

It’s clear this is non-negotiable. So I decide to drop it and mention that I know a good restaurant where the six of us can eat. There’s a little debate if we’re going to walk there or grab a cab. But eventually, we all go for the walk and figure we’ll determine how we get back once we get in the restaurant.

So after we all finish unpacking, we head out to the restaurant. I rented this specific cabin because it’s the furthest down the beach. I figured this would automatically mean that we’d have the least traffic from people passing by. The only downside is that the total walk takes us a little over thirty minutes by being so far up the beach. And the restaurant being a bit out of the touristic coastal area doesn’t help either. Luke, Miranda, and I talk a little about the history I’ve got with the island. They already know about my past in the special forces and that I’ve been to this island a lot. I tell them I can’t talk too much about what I’ve done, and they get it and respect it.

As we walk, I notice how well the boys and Audrey get along. They’re constantly laughing and goofing around, which warms my heart.

Dinner is excellent, and we laugh a lot. Especially when Evan and Owen take turns in telling jokes. Both Luke and Miranda are funny people to be around with. At one moment during dinner, Audrey and I look at each other, and I realize how glad I am that she has this much fun after losing her dad.

During the walk back, we talk about the shoot the next day. It’s an early start, but neither the twins nor Audrey seem bothered by it. However, I see Luke looking a bit apprehensive, so I say, “You can join us later. The first part will be setting up the scene and composition anyways.”

“Is that okay with you?” Luke asks, looking slightly embarrassed.

“Of course! The boys and Audrey know what to do. You come and join us when you’re ready. After all, it’s your holiday.”

“Great. And thanks,” he smiles.

When we arrive at the beach entrance and take off our shoes, I smile mischievously and say, “You know what?”

“What?” Owen asks curiously.

“Officially, this is a clothing-optional beach.”

“Really?” both boys ask simultaneously.

“No kidding,” I say, and I see the boys unit at each other.

As they stand up and start pulling up their shirts, Miranda clears her throat.

“Don’t even think about it, little men,” she sternly says.

“But Mom…” Owen whines.

“Listen, guys,” I interrupt. “Officially, all beaches on the island are clothing-optional. With the emphasis on officially.”

“What do you mean?” Evan asks.

“Well… back when I was your age, Glenn and I lounged naked on this beach a few times. A lot of people did. Some wore clothes, some didn’t. No one cared.”

“Oh wow,” Evan whispers.

“We can walk around naked on the beach?” Owen adds.

“Yeah… well… not quite anymore. A couple of years ago, a new leader was put in charge by the military, and this changed a lot. And I mean A LOT! It also changed the way people thought about things. Or better, They were told how to think about things. This led to many protests, but the new leader ended these the hard way,” I say, realizing everyone is listening intently.

“I heard about that,” Luke says as he grabs his shoes and looks at us. “But there’s peace now, right?”

“Relative peace, yes. But then there’s also the threat coming from Nicaragua,” I say glumly.

“Trouble in paradise,” Miranda adds.

“Yeah. Such a shame for the people on this beautiful island,” I say as I look around.

During our conversation, we start walking back to the cabin. Once we get there, Audrey unlocks the door and says, “Let’s try to have fun anyways. Clothes or no clothes.”

I laugh at that, and so do Miranda and Luke. Finally, Owen, always wanting to have the last word, softly says, “Well… I prefer the no-clothes option.”

I can’t help myself but chuckle softly. I glance over at Luke and see him chuckling too. Miranda’s face looks serious, but I can see by her eyes that she’s amused too.

“Okay. We’re going to bed,” I announce, attempting to change the subject.

“Us too,” Miranda says, looks at the boys, and asks, “You’ve got your phones to set your alarm?”

“Got it, Mom. We get up at seven. Right, Mr. H?”

“Right. We’ll eat on the porch, and the clothes we need are in the shed. So you two can sleep in if you want,” I say, smiling at Luke and Miranda.

“Thanks. Appreciate it,” Luke says.

“Goodnight!” Audrey says and opens our bedroom door.

“Night,” we all say simultaneously, which results in some giggles.

I start undressing, and as I pull up the thin sheet, my eyes drink in the sight of Audrey’s nude body. She smiles broadly as she crawls in too and sees me looking.

“I’m SO excited that we’re really here!” She says and kisses me on my cheek.

“Me too! Can’t wait to get started on the swimsuit pics. Too bad we have to wait for these a bit longer.”

“Ah well… consider tomorrow as a warm-up,” Audrey laughs softly.

She crawls up against me in her usual spot. With her warm pussy pressed against my leg and her nipple poking my chest, I realize once again how lucky I am. Her hand slowly moves down over my belly, and a moment later, her small hand finds my soft dick and wraps around it. Her touch gets me hard in seconds, and Audrey giggles as she feels this.

“We can’t do this now, Lil’ Bit,” I say, reluctant but sternly.

“I know. But I just like lying close to you and holding this,” she says, squeezing my dick.

“Well… have fun,” I snicker.

“I will. Night.”

“Night,” I say, and I kiss Audrey on her forehead.

* * *

The soft buzz from my phone roughly pulls me out of a deep sleep. I feel a warm breeze over my body and need a moment to realize where I am. The reddish-yellow morning light is filling the room, and when I look over at Audrey, it immediately comes back to me where I am.

She turned onto her back during the night, and her arms are lying above her head now. With her legs slightly parted, she’s completely exposed, and I don’t let the opportunity to check her out thoroughly again go to waste.

As my eyes and on her bald and incredibly sexy pussy, I have to suppress the urge to lick and caress it. But it’s difficult when she’s looking this inviting. So instead, I softly rub her cheek and whisper her name.

Her eyes flutter open, and after a long yawn, she smiles at me, followed by a stretch.

“It’s really happening today,” she whispers.

“Yep! Ready for it?”

“Oh yeah!” and after a few moments, she asks, “Scott?”

“Audrey?” I reply, smiling, but this fades quickly when I see her face turned all serious.

“Do you think it’s okay if I let Evan and Owen see me… uhm… naked too?”

This one catches me off-guard. I think about it for a few seconds and say, “Well… it’s your body, Lil’ Bit. So you decide who sees it or touches you. That’s entirely up to you and to no one else but you. I know you’re far from reckless, so I trust you’ll always make the right decision.”

“You really think that? Thanks!” She whispers and gives me a hug.

“And it’s a completely safe environment here, so I don’t see any harm in it,” I say and avoid asking about the reason why.

“I do feel safe. And I think it’ll be fun to see their reaction. And I think it’s… fair, I guess?”

“That alone is not a very good reason to do this. But I get what you mean. After all this time together, it feels like a natural thing to do.”

“Yeah! That’s it! That’s what I mean. It feels like a logical step for me,” Audrey smiles excitedly.

“And I’d love to see their reaction too,” I snicker.

“Yeah. Do you think they’ll get… uhm… hard?” she whispers, and I can see her blush.

“Hundred percent! They’ve never seen a beautiful girl like you naked. And considering their reaction when you were in your bikini… I’m sure they’ll get hard and give you a lot of attention.”

“I like the idea, but I’m also a little nervous about doing it. I mean… with you, it wasn’t a big deal to me, but now I feel butterflies just thinking about it,” she says softly.

“That’s normal. They’re about your age, they’re your friends, and a lot younger than me. Just remember. No one is forcing you to do this! And if you don’t want to do it, fine! If you regret doing it? Just put your clothes back on. If you need help? Just ask. But don’t feel pressured and take your time. That’s all I have to say about it. The rest is up to you, Lil’ Bit.”

“You’re such a great guy!” she says and dives in for another hug.

“Thanks. You’re not too bad yourself,” I say and give her another kiss on her forehead.

After lying like this for a few more minutes, I say, “I’ll go grab us breakfast and set the table on the porch. See you in a sec,” I say as I get up, pull up my shorts, and grab my shirt.

“I’ll do my hair. See you outside.”

“Be quiet, okay? I don’t want to wake Luke and Miranda. Maybe the boys will, but that’s out of our control. We need them in our team.”

“I get it. Don’t worry,” she smiles, and after I let my eyes roam over her naked body one last time, I slowly open the bedroom door and head for the kitchen.

Knowing some people on the island and calling in a few favors came in handy. When I booked the cabin, I arranged for the shed, usually used to store beach stuff, to be cleared out. The guy I know at the Fed-Ex office placed all the clothes I sent him in the shed, and Thiago’s wife made sure there were groceries in the fridge and cabinets.

This way, we only had to unpack our suitcases when we arrived. Now we can start shooting without caring about all the other practical stuff. It didn’t cost me much, and next time I’m here and have more time on my hand, I’ll visit and thank them properly.

After putting the breakfast stuff on the table, I look at the beach. Seeing it by full daylight again sure brings back some memories. I have to swallow a lump in my throat away as memories of Glenn fill my mind.

“Morning, Mr. H,” I hear behind me and see one of the boys walk onto the porch, dressed in his tight red boxer briefs.

“Morning. Owen?” I ask as my eyes roam over his body and prominent bulge.

“Evan,” he mumbles and sits down on the nearest chair.

“Morning, Evan. Ready for the big day?”

“Yeah. But it’s early, so just give me a sec please,” he yawns.

“Hi guys,” I hear Audrey say cheerfully as she walks onto the porch.

I see Evan’s eyes grow wide, and he seems instantly awake. So I turn to look at her and realize Audrey has already dropped her modesty. She’s wearing her favorite hipster-style panties, only red instead of pink ones this time. Her small black bra covers her boobs, but that’s all she’s currently wearing. And she looks mighty fine like this.

“M- morning,” Evan croaks.

“Hey! Same color underwear!” Audrey points out and sits down at the table as if she’s done this a dozen times.

“Uhm… yeah,” is all that comes out of Evan’s mouth, his eyes glued to her body.

“Morni… oh!” Owens says as he joins us.

He’s in just his boxers too, only is he wearing bright green ones, which helps me to distinguish the two. His eyes roam over Audrey’s body, and he stops scratching his ass as he’s standing there.

“You… uhm… look great,” Owen stammers.

“Thanks! You too,” she smirks. “I figured that just wearing underwear is easier for the shoot. In the studio, you did that too, and I found it pretty efficient. And besides, you’ve seen me in my bikini already, so…”

“Yeah. We did. But..” Owen says softly.

“But what?” Audrey asks innocently, but I know by now that she’s just playing with them.

“Nevermind,” Owen trails off but looks big-eyes at his brother, who simply nods.

Breakfast itself is uneventful, but the boys keep stealing glances at Audrey while I keep glancing at all of them. After we’re done, I quietly put the stuff in the kitchen, and we head out to the shed. It feels a bit odd to do this with three underwear-clad preteens at my side, but I don’t complain.

We grab the schedule Audrey and I created back home, and we select the clothes we need. Next, I set up my camera at the first location. Then, after making sure all the settings, composition, and lighting are correct, I instruct the kids to walk toward me and tell jokes to each other, so they look all spontaneous and smiling.

After the first set of pics, I see Miranda and Luke walk toward us. She’s carrying a tray with drinks, and Luke is behind her with two chairs.

“How’s it going?” she asks as she hands me a mug filled with coffee and the soda to the kids.

“Great! They’re naturals!” I beam, genuinely glad about the way they act and the chemistry between the three of them.

Miranda and Luke settle themselves on the chairs on the beach and watch us work. Thankfully, they don’t interfere or comment on what we’re doing. So I don’t really care that they’re watching.

During the rest of the morning, we do all sorts of shoots in different combinations with the kids and in different locations. The last one of the day is on the porch of our condo. I glance over at Luke and Miranda, and they look pretty bored. They don’t complain or anything, but it’s clear they’re not enjoying themselves very much.

“That’s it for today!” I call out.

The kids high-five each other, and I see Owen nod toward me. Then, Audrey looks at me and asks, “We wanna go swimming in the ocean. Is that okay?”

“I don’t see why not,” I say and look over at Luke.

He just shrugs and says, “Have fun. Just make sure to stay in sight, okay?”

“Okay!” Audrey says and quickly walks into the condo.

“Will do, Dad,” Evan says, and the boys head inside to change too.

Miranda gets back from the kitchen with a glass of wine in her hand. She hands Luke and me a beer, and we settle down on the porch, looking at the ocean.

We sit like that for a few moments when the boys join us. They’ve got beach towels around their necks and are dressed in typical surfer boardshorts. Combined with the shorts and the beach, their natural look seems so much more in place here than in Seattle. I inwardly laugh at that observation and just look at those extraordinary boys.

But when Audrey opens the door and stands there in her black, sexy as fuck bikini with the towel in her hand, eight male eyes immediately drink in every inch of her.

“Ready?” she simply asks and starts walking toward the beach, showing off her tight body.

“Hell yeah!” Owen whisperers so softly that only Evan and I can probably hear.

“Ready!” Evan croaks as he starts walking too.

I notice both Miranda and Luke looking at Audrey. Judging by their looks and seeing Audrey walking around like this, I feel I need to say something about her bikini.

“Bikinis these days are skimpier than I remember growing up,” I say, with a fake embarrassment.

“Nonsense!” Miranda responds sternly, “Audrey looks great in it! No need to be embarrassed.”

“She also tried on others, but this one was perfect according to the women at the shop. Audrey wanted this one, and if it’s the latest fashion, who am I to judge? She does look fine in it.”

“Yeah. She really does. What do YOU think of it, honey?” Miranda asks, with a hint of scorn in her voice.

“Uhm… I uh…” Luke stammers, and he seems a bit uncomfortable, and a look of guilt spreads across his face. Then he regains his confidence, clears his throat, and says, “You’re magnificent with these kids, Scott. The way they’re acting in front of your camera and the way you direct them is amazing. But, to me, it seems like it doesn’t feel like work for them.”

“Thanks! I appreciate it. I always try to work this way. When the models are comfortable, it always shows on film. Always. I think it’s my job to make them feel that way. So I’m glad it’s being noticed,” I smile.

“You’re amazing,” Miranda adds. “But despite the wonderful view, it’s a little boring to us. Right, dear?”

It’s clear now that Miranda is toying a bit with Luke. But she also made a point here. So now I know I have to be careful how I look at these kids too, although I’ve got the excuse of the photographers’ eye.

“Yeah. It is. Besides getting food and drinks, isn’t there something we can do to help?” Luke asks me.

I pretend to think about it for a minute because having them around too closely will only disturb the shoot. “Uhm. Actually, no. And to be honest, it might disturb the chemistry. But besides that, I really don’t have anything else to do. Sorry.” I say with an apologetic face.

“I see. And I guess you’re right. It’ll be a long week then, dear,” Miranda says, smiling at Luke.

“We can always go shopping tomorrow, but we’ll be done in under an hour judging by the stores I’ve seen so far. And then we’ve still got a few days left. Ah well… at least the weather and the view are great,” Luke replies, trying to sound optimistic.

“If you’d like, I can call an old friend that organizes guided tours through the jungle. These are multi-day trips, and you’ll see all the beauty the north side of the island has to offer.”

Luke immediately sits up straight and looks excitedly at Miranda. But by the look on her face, she has reservations about the idea.

“We knew this trip wasn’t going to be the most exciting one, dear. We can’t leave Scott and make him take care of our kids.”

“Nonsense! Sure you can!” I reply sternly. “It’s your holiday too, and I can handle these three. So don’t worry about that.”

“See?” Luke says hopefully to Miranda.

“But what about the boys? They can be such a handful,” she says, still trying, but it’s clear she’s starting to like the idea.

“What about ‘em? They’re having so much fun with Scott and Audrey that they probably won’t even notice we’re gone!”

“Well… it does sound like fun,” she says with a small smile forming around her mouth.

Luke looks at me and nods. I grab my phone, dial the number, and after about fifteen minutes, all the arrangements are made. It turns out that they’re lucky because the following day, a trip is planned, and there’s still room for them. They’ll be gone for three nights in a row, but by then, they’ve seen all the beautiful places the island has to offer. They’re being picked up at around nine, and they’re told what kind of clothes to pack.

“Cheers!” Miranda says after she grabs us two new beers and holds up her glass.

“Cheers!” We say as our glasses touch.

I smile, glad to have the three kids to myself. And as I look at the kids playing in the tide and seeing how much innocent fun they’re having, a feeling of utter happiness washes over me.

* * *

“Have fun!” Owen says as Miranda and Luke get on the bus.

“Thanks. And remember, you listen to Scott! If I hear that even one of you misbehaved, you’re in for something!” Miranda says with a stern look on her face.

“I know, Mom. Don’t worry! Just have fun out there,” Evan replies.

“Just call us if something happens, okay, Scott?” Miranda says in a last attempt to stay in control.

“Of course. But there won’t be anything. Trust me. So make sure to enjoy this trip,” I smile.

I know perfectly well that calling her is useless. There won’t be a signal anywhere in the jungle. And if there is, it’ll take them at least six hours to get here. But I figure she likes the idea, so I let her be.

“Come on, dear. We’re leaving,” Luke says and gently urges her into the bus.

We watch as Miranda and Luke take their place on the bus. Then, as it starts pulling away, we wave at them and wait for it to disappear from sight.

“Party time!” Owen exclaims as he puts his hands in the air.

“The hell it is,” I smile, knowing he’s joking. “We’ve got work to do.”

“I know. I’m kidding. What’s our schedule for today?”

As we walk back toward the cabin, we talk about the plans for today. We’ve still got a few more regular clothes to shoot. I want to do a few swimsuit shots too today, but I think it’s better to do these when the sun starts setting.

When we get to the shed, Audrey is the first to grab her clothes. I help the boys with their clothes, and as we turn around, I hear both boys suck in their breaths beside me.

I look over at what they’re looking at, and I see Audrey with her back toward us, completely naked except for her red hipster panties. She seems to be struggling with the tank top she’s going to wear under her blouse, and it allows us to check her out thoroughly.

“You okay there, Lil’ Bit?” I ask, ignoring the boys.

“Yeah. It’s just this stupid top! It’s got multiple layers of overlapping fabric, and I can’t get it right,” She replies. She pretends to be angry, but I know her well enough by now to know she’s faking it.

“Do you need help?” Owen asks, winking and smirking at his brother.

“Yes, please!” Audrey says, turns around, and walks toward us.

“Uh…” Owen stammers, suddenly seeming very insecure, but his eyes glued to Audrey’s chest.

“Oh!” Audrey exclaims and suddenly stops moving while holding her tank top in front of her boobs, looking innocently at the boys. Then she asks, “you don’t mind, do you?”

“I uhm… ahem! No. No! Of course not,” Owen says, clearly blown away by this, his tented underwear betraying him. “It’s just that… I didn’t expect it. That’s all.”

“Here, let me help you,” Evan quickly says, walking over to Audrey and outsmarting his brother.

“Thanks!” Audrey smiles and hands him her top.

The boys’ reaction is priceless. Both of them do their best not to look at Audrey’s chest too openly, but looking at them from a distance, I can see they fail miserably at it. And seeing both boxer-clad boners is a big giveaway about how excited they are too.

I see Audrey glance at me, and I give her a quick wink, bringing a sly smile to her face. Meanwhile, Evan’s shaking hands have undone her tank top, and he says, “Hold up your arms.”

Audrey complies immediately, and Evan slides the top over her arms, pulls it down, and covers her chest.

“Thanks,” she says and straightens her top.

“Don’t mention it,” Evan says, trying to keep his cool the best he can.

“You sure you’re not offended by me?” Audrey asks as she openly eyes their boners and makes it clear she noticed.

“You look amazing!” Owen says without thinking.

After realizing what he said, he clears his throat and adds, “I mean… you don’t mind seeing us naked, so why would we? We’re all professionals here,” he smiles, but his usual confidence is gone.

I decide it’s time to spring into action, so I say, “It’s not uncommon to see other people naked during shoots. Heck! It’ll be virtually impossible not to see the others while changing with the swimsuit shoots later on. I don’t think anyone has issues with it, so why don’t we just get it over with? There’s nobody on the beach right now, and we’re pretty secluded here between the shed and the cabin…”

I give them time to let my words sink in, and I quickly see the realization land with Evan. To get things moving, I start taking off my shirt, and after throwing it in the sand, I start sliding down my shorts.

“What… oh!” Owen says as he sees my boxers come into view.

“Great idea, Scott!” Audrey chirps and starts taking off her top.

“Yeah! Excellent!” Evan says and slides down his boxers in record time.

With a loud slap against his belly, his boner springs free, and he kicks his boxers aside. I hesitate slightly but figure I might as well join them so there won’t be any more weirdness. So I slide down my boxers too, glad I’m still mostly soft, so I don’t scare anyone.

Owen lags behind, but the moment Audrey starts working on her panties, he kicks into gear too. A slap against his belly indicates he’s naked too. Moments later, we’re all done, standing straight and looking at each other. Both boys are stiff, and their gaze switches between Audrey and me but focuses mainly on Audrey’s fabulous body.

Audrey’s eyes are glued on both preteen boners, and so are mine. Their tight, bronzed bodies look even hotter with these hard cocks sticking out from their groins.

Owen, getting famous for his lack of filter when he talks, looks at Audrey and asks, “You don’t have hairs yet?” and starts tugging at his own to prove his point.

“I do! But those peeked out of my bikini, so Scott shaved them for me,” Audrey says proudly.

“I like it!” Owen exclaims, “Will you shave me too, please?” he asks, looking at me.

Already looking forward to it, I reply, “Of course! It makes shooting the speedos easier too,” and the three of them start smiling at the image of the incident in the studio.

As Audrey stands there with her hands on her hips for all three of us to see, I feel a weird feeling of pride wash over me. This timid little girl is starting to make her own conscious decisions and stands by them. And she looks mighty fine doing it.

“Okay, guys. Take a good, long look at each other, so next time, hopefully, there won’t be anymore awkwardness,” I say, drinking in the sight in front of me.

After about a minute or so, I announce, “Right. I think this is enough for now. Grab your clothes and put them on, so we can head out to the end of the beach.”

We all start putting on our clothes, and I can feel that the little tension there was, is completely gone. Audrey and the boys are laughing and cracking jokes like nothing out of the ordinary has happened.

I grab my camera bag, lock the shed, and start walking toward the end of the beach. The boys are walking to my right, carrying the bag with beach stuff, and Audrey is to my left, carrying a bag with clothes we need later. She grabs my hand without saying a word, and we keep walking like that.

After a few moments of walking like this in silence, Audrey asks, “Did I cause you guys to get hard back there?”

“Well… Duh!” Owen replies instantly, “I never saw a naked girl before, let alone such a beautiful one!”

He starts blushing when he realizes his mouth is faster than his brain again but relaxes the moment Audrey giggles and says, “Thanks, Owen. That’s sweet.”

“Why did you do it too, Mr. H?” Evan asks as he kicks against a shell sticking out of the sand, helping out his brother.

“I want the four of us to trust each other completely. And I think this undressing session is part of that circle of trust,” I say, trying to sound smart and like it’s normal to do before a shoot.

“You’ve got a big one,” Owen says.

“Nah. I’m pretty average. A little thicker than most maybe, but that’s all.”

“You’re bigger than our dad,” Evan adds.

“I… uhm… okay,” I reply, lost for anything else to say.

When we get to the end of the beach, we arrive at the line of trees and bushes that seems a bit out of place here. Just like the first time I saw this years ago when Glenn and I were here, the thick foliage extends all the way down to the water’s edge and may be even thicker than I remember it. “What’s on the other side?” Owen asks as I’m setting up my gear.

The kids notice it as well. “What’s on the other side?” Owen asks as I’m setting up my gear.

“I don’t know. You can’t go around it. I remember Glenn said it probably extends all the way into the ocean, or maybe just a few rocks behind it. I never checked.”

“Can we go and check it?” Evan asks excitedly.

Audrey and Owen seem excited to check it out too, and I’m pretty curious about it myself. But I figure I can use this curiosity to my advantage, so I say, “Tell you what. When the shoot is done, and we’ve got some time left, we’ll check it out. Deal?”

“Deal! What do you want us to do?”

I start directing the kids, and they’re all extremely cooperative. It’s clear they all want to check out the mystery behind the trees because they tell each other to stay focused when someone isn’t paying attention.

This works exceptionally well, and before I know it, we’re done. Judging by the sun, it’s just a little past noon. So I check my phone, which confirms it.

“You were awesome, guys! We’re ready for this morning,” I smile and start putting my camera stuff in the bag.

“So we can go and check it out now?” Owen asks excitedly, already turning around.

“Wait!” I exclaim, “Not with these clothes. I don’t want them to get damaged, so we need to get to the house and get changed first.”

“But Scott…” Audrey starts whining.

“You promised, Mr. H!” Evan says, clearly disappointed.

“What if we just take off the clothes?” Owen says, looking expectantly at me, causing the two other heads to turn and nod at me.

“It’s a five-minute walk to the house!” I say, a bit surprised by their reaction.

“So?” Audrey asks, already unbuttoning her blouse.

“Okay then. If it’s such a big deal…” I smile.

Within a few moments, all B-Wyze clothes are off, placed inside the bag, leaving the three kids in their underwear. Four eyes are glued to Audrey’s chest, but she pretends she doesn’t notice. I insist they wear the shoes because I don’t want anyone to get hurt, delaying the shoot because of that.

“Let’s go!” Owen says, and we start working our way through the thick foliage of the trees and bushes. It takes us a bit of time to find a path, and after a while of winding through the trees, light from the other side is visible through the trees.

“I can see the end!” Owen shouts as if we’re in the middle of dense rainforest.

I guess the entire strip of the bush is about fifty feet wide, and despite what it looks like from the beach, it’s not too difficult to pass through. The ground is mainly covered with the same sand as on the beach, and if you watch where you’re going, you don’t even need shoes to protect your feet.

“Fucking hell!” Owen exclaims as he clears the bushes.

“Oh my!” Audrey says as she’s right behind Owen.

“Jesus!” I hear Evan say in front of me.

And when I finally get out, I’m greeted by a magnificent piece of the island. Instead of the expected rocks, we’re on a pristine beach. It’s about eighty by a hundred and fifty feet, with waves gently caressing the sand as they get to shore. Spread over the beach, a few palm trees provide some shadow, and the sand is almost white.

Glenn was right about the rocks. Because twenty to thirty feet from the shore, pointy rocks stick out of the water and break the waves. This is a highly secluded area, and it makes me feel like we’ve found paradise on earth.

“This used to be a pirate hideout!” Evan states with a certainty that’s pretty amusing.

“You might be right,” I say, feeding his imagination.

“Do you think there’s a treasure buried over here?” Owen says with big eyes as he turns toward me.

“Dunno. Might be. But pirates used to bury their treasures away from their home,” I say, still trying to sound as hyped as them.

“Yeah. Guess you’re right,” Evan says, a bit disappointed.

We all explore some more, and after about half an hour, I look over at Audrey. She walked ankle-deep into the ocean and is now looking at something in the distance. Her back is toward me, and I notice only a few main colors are visible here on this beach and at this time of day. Mostly yellow and white, because of the beach and the sun.

Due to this lack of more colors, her black hair and red panties really stand out. So I quickly grab my camera, and right at the moment I start snapping away, a gush of wind lifts her hair. I check the display on my camera and realize I accidentally made one of my best pictures ever. Both the composition and the subject in the picture look spotless. I need to check it out on my computer, but I’m pretty confident about this one, even though I can only check it on this tiny screen.

After a few more minutes, all three kids gather around me. I look at them and ask, “Time for some lunch?”

“Yeah. I’m getting hungry,” Evan says, rubbing his belly to emphasize his point.

After our trip through the bushes, we walk back toward the cabin. Audrey quickly slips on her blouse to cover herself up, just in case. We all talk excitedly about the private beach we found.

“Can’t we just have lunch here?” Audrey asks as we enter the cabin.

“Yeah,” Evan chips in, “I don’t feel like getting dressed and walking all the way over to the boulevard.”

“Sure! We’ve got plenty of stuff to eat in here,” I answer, not too fond of getting out either.

So I prepare some sandwiches with Audrey helping me. And after we’re done eating and just chilling on the porch, I say, “I think we might as well do the afternoon swimsuit shoot on our newly found private beach. There are lots of nice shadows and backgrounds over there too. What do you think?”

“Yeah!” they all nod in agreement.

The boys clean up, and we chill some more in the shadow of our porch. I feel delighted about our current situation and let out a deep sigh. Audrey looks over and smiles, her blouse open with parts of her boobs showing.

“I’m glad we did what we did earlier,” she says, smiling at us.

“Me too,” Evan adds, immediately catching on to what Audrey’s talking about.

“Good to hear,” I say. “And I’m glad you’re comfortable around each other like that. I’ve been at shoots where nudity was a real issue, and they all went horribly wrong.”

“Yeah… about that…” Owen trails off, and a sly smile appears around his lips.

I notice Evan smiling too, but I don’t have a clue where this is going. When I glance over at Audrey, I’m glad to see she seems clueless too.

“Well… we’re doing swimsuits this afternoon, and ‘something’ might peek out,” he says, making air quotes with the word something.

“Oh!” I say, suddenly catching on.

“Can you shave me before we do that shoot, please?” Owen continues, the smile never leaving his face and his dick clearly growing.

“Uhm… I don’t see why not,” I reply, inwardly jumping with joy.

“Will you do me too?” Evan adds quickly.

“Can I watch?” Audrey says almost at the same time.

“Whoa! Relax! One at a time,” I chuckle. “Sure, Evan. No problem. And Audrey, that’s not up to me.”

“Sure! You can watch. I don’t care,” Owen says, and Evan nods at that.

“That’s settled then. Let’s get to the bathroom,” I say, standing up.

The bathroom isn’t big enough for the four of us. So as I start rummaging through my stuff to look for the right razor, I instruct Owen to get in the shower stall and leave the curtain open. Evan and Audrey can look from the doorway.

I turn around, and Owen is just standing there in his green boxers, looking expectantly at me. I smile at him and point at his boxers.

“Off they go,” I say.

Owen doesn’t hesitate, hooks his thumbs in the waistband, and slides them down. When his dick comes into view, I’m a bit surprised to see he’s still soft. I blame it on the fact that he’s probably a bit anxious about what’s going to happen.

“Grab the showerhead and make sure the water is lukewarm. That’s more comfortable for you and easier to shave,” I snicker.

Moments later, and after checking out his cute bubble butt again, he turns around.

“Now what?” he asks.

“Make sure your pubes, penis, balls are nice and wet,” I say as I grab the can of shaving foam.

Owen is being his typical self and is making a show out of it. He ‘accidentally’ sprays some water on Audrey and Evan but stops once he sees the stern look on my face.

“Do you want to apply it yourself?” I ask as I hold up the can.

He looks questionably at me and shakes his head. “No. You do it. I don’t know how that stuff works.”

“You know that means that I have to touch you. You know… down there…” I say to clarify things and ensure I won’t get into trouble.

“Yeah. So what?” Owen says, clearly not seeing any issues with it.

“I’m just saying…” I trail off, very excited to the prospect of touching his heavenly body.

I spray some cream on my hand, and Owen watches intensely as it expands in my hand. I get on my knees in front of him, and I’m treated with the best view yet of his gorgeous cock. I look up and ask, “Ready?”

A simple nod is all I get, and I start rubbing the foam all around his dick and over his almost hairless sack. Within seconds, he’s hard as a rock and mumbles, “I’m sorry,” just loud enough for me to hear.

“Don’t worry about it,” I answer just as softly.

I rub around a little more and grab my razor in my right hand. I reach out with my left to take hold of the first preteen boner I’ve held in my hands for years. Right before I take hold of it, I look up at Owen, and a simple nod is all the confirmation I get and all I need to start.

“Why are you hard, Owen?” I hear Audrey ask behind me, right before my fingers wrap around Owen’s boyhood.

“He can’t help it, Lil’ Bit. With all the action down here and you guys watching.”

“Oh. Really?” she asks, surprised.

“Yeah. Can’t help it,” he says, but he doesn’t seem ashamed.

“But it’s much easier to shave this way,” I lie and wink at Owen.

Having waited long enough now, I take hold of Owen’s boner and love how it feels in my hand. The hardness of it surprises me, and I just have to give it a slight wank. The gasp above me makes me smile, and I start shaving. I move his boner around during the shaving session to provide me with room to shave. I love the feeling of his hard tube between my fingers, and I know I’m overdoing it, but I just can’t help it.

The moment I think it’s no longer believable to keep going, I lay down my razor and give him one more slow wank.

“Time to clean it up,” I say and gently take the showerhead to wash him clean.

I also take my time with this, and I boldly take hold of his balls, lift them and pretend I need to wash there thoroughly too.

“All done,” I say, feeling a bit sad it’s over already. “How’s it feel?”

Owen starts probing around with his fingers and starts giggling.

“I feel like a little boy again,” he says and looks at his brother. “You do it too, Dude!”

Evan shrugs and asks, “You’ll do me too, right?”

Oh, I’ll do you, alright. Just tell me where and when I think to myself. But instead, I say, “Of course! Get over here.”

The process is basically the same. He starts out soft, and once I start, he’s hard within seconds. After I clear the hairs over and around the birthmark, I hear Audrey and Owen chuckling. They’re laughing because of how he looks now, but they quickly focus on Evan and me.

Working on my second preteen cock, has gotten me pretty worked up. I know that no one can see it, but my straining boner is starting to leak precum. I can only hope my boxers will absorb enough so it won’t show through my shorts.

After I’m done with Evan, and all three of them are giggling like schoolgirls when they check out the result, I get up.

“You too, Mr. H!” Owen exclaims.

“Yeah!” Audrey exclaims enthusiastically.

I smile at them and shrug. “Okay. I don’t see why not,” warming up to the idea.

“It makes your dick look bigger,” Owen says and looks down at his crotch.

“We’ll help you, Mr. H,” Evan says as he picks up the razor.

“Thanks, but no thanks. No offense, but I don’t want a bloodbath in here,” I smile, and Evan realizes I’m right.

“We can apply the foam and rinse,” Owen says, stepping forward.

“I… uhm… it’s…” I stammer, lost for words and needing a way out so they won’t see my boner.

“He’s just embarrassed that he’s hard,” Audrey says, still standing in the doorway with her eyes on my crotch.

Owen and Evan look me in my eyes, and Owen asks, “So what? You said yourself that it’s no big deal.”

“Yeah! And it’s even easier to shave that way,” Evan chips in.

Not seeing a quick way out, I give in. I lift my shirt and drop my shorts and boxers in one move. Both boys ‘ eyes grow wide as my dick slaps against my belly.

“Whoa! It’s huge!” Owen says, openly checking out my boner.

“I’m just…” I try but stop my protest as Evan gently pushes me toward the shower.

Owen grabs the shower head and starts spraying around my dick and balls. In the meantime, Evan takes the can with shaving cream and sprays it on his hand. Owen holds up his hand when he’s done with the water, and he’s given a big glob too. They look at each other, and without words, they start covering my pubes, dick, and balls in a thick coat of shaving cream.

The feeling of four small hands rubbing around my most sensitive area is magnificent. I can barely hold back a moan, and when I look over at Audrey, she’s smiling broadly, alternating her gaze between the action between my legs and the boys’ naked backsides.

“Here you go, Mr. H,” Owen says as he hands me the razor.

I look down at the boys, and their identical faces are focused on my dick. The idea of this audience so close is extremely hot, so I decide to go for it. I make a bit of a show out of it and point my dick from left to right, up and down, and everything in between.

When I start working on my balls, I place my dick against my belly and smile at their wide-open eyes and looks of concentration on their faces. I’ve always focused on my manscaping because I hate a big bush. Thankfully, I’m not too hairy down there, but still. So because I don’t have to cut away an entire forest, I’m done relatively quickly.

“All done,”‘I say, looking down.

Owen immediately starts spraying off the remaining shaving cream, and before I can react, both hands are feeling around my now bare pubes and are cupping my hairless balls.

“All smooth, Mr. H!” Evan says after they thoroughly checked if I did a decent job.

“Thanks,” I smile, flushed by all the attention they gave me.

And as if nothing weird has happened, the boys grab their boxers, pull them up, and walk away while chatting with Audrey.

Now that I’m all alone in the bathroom, I take a deep breath and let the events sink in. I let my racing heart calm down, putting on my clothes. After cleaning up, I feel relaxed enough to leave the bathroom and join the kids on the porch.

* * *

“When does the next shoot start, Mr. H?” Evan asks as I sit down next to him at the table.

I look up to check where the sun currently is and say, “We can go now if you’re ready.”

“Yesss!” Owen exclaims.

“Just make sure to grab the beach toys to liven up the shoot, okay? And the big blanket. Oh! And the sunscreen just in case. Audrey and I will grab the clothes we need for this one.”

After I lock the cabin, we start walking back toward the bush at the end of the regular beach. Owen and Audrey walk in front of me, talking about some video game they’re both playing. I see Evan dropping back a little, and he ends up walking next to me.

“It feels a bit weird,” he says and scratches his pubic bone.

“Yeah. It takes a little getting used to,” I reply.

“I didn’t know I got used to my hairs so quickly. I like the way it looks now, though,” he adds.

“I do too,” I say, as I feel a blush spread across my face and avoid his look.

“I liked helping you,” Evan almost whispers, “I’ve never touched another guy’s junk before.”

“And I really like what you did. You were pros! But I know what you mean. I liked doing it to you too. At first, I was afraid it might be weird, but it never was,” I respond and look at him despite my flushed face.

“Uhm… Audrey talked to us about your Pyntar pics. I was wondering… can we do some of these too?” Evan says after we walk quietly for a bit.

“I don’t think your mom will…” I say after thinking about it for a few moments.

“Mom doesn’t have to know,” Evan immediately interrupts me.

We stop walking, and I look at him. His face is dead serious, and he seems more determined than I’ve seen him before.

“Did Audrey tell you what’s the common dress code during these shoots?” I ask, trying to size him up.

“Yeah. And I think that’s the most fun part of it,” he chuckles. “And the artistic contribution we make, of course,” he quickly adds with a big smile across his face.

“I’ll think about it. But, first, we need to finish the shots we’re here for,” I say, but I already have a few compositions in my head, and I warm up to the idea quickly.

“We’re here!” Owen shouts as he’s waiting with Audrey for us in front of the bush.

We work our way through the foliage, and once we get to the other side, I’m impressed again with how unique this spot is. Audrey lays out the swimsuits they need to wear in the proper order.

Moments later, I’m looking at three naked kids again. They’re chatting and laughing, seemingly not caring about the nudity. But I can see them stealing glances at each other, which isn’t strange, of course.

After I’m done with my camera, we start shooting mood shots with these new swimsuits. It takes us longer than expected, but I’m delighted with the results. All planned swimwear sets look great as far as I can see on the small camera screen.

As I’m checking my camera, Audrey walks up to me and asks softly, “Can we do a Pyntar shoot now, please? I love the atmosphere here, and Owen and Evan want to do it too.”

I look at her, and her puppy eyes make my heart melt. But during the shoot, I had already made up my mind to do this.

“Are you sure, Lil’ Bit?”

“Oh yeah! Will you do it?”

“Hey, guys! You wanna do that Pyntar shoot now?” I shout out at the boys.

“Are you shitting me? Of course!” Owen says as his face lights up.

“Let’s do it,” I say and change the memory card in my camera.

The three of them look at me for directions. I smile at the nervous looks on their faces and realize they need me to take the lead.

“Alright. First, spread out the big blanket on the sand,” I say to Audrey.

Owen and Evan immediately start helping her, glad to have something on their hands. They first spread it out in the middle of the beach, but I gently urge them to place it in the shadow of a palm tree.

“Now what?” Owen asks me, and I glance at his speedo, which has barely enough room to hide his hard-on.

“Now… it’s naked time,” I say to the three of them and smile as they waste no time getting undressed.

Audrey and I check out two boners while the boys’ eyes roam all over Audrey’s body. I can almost feel the tension in the air. So I quickly direct them to their first pose.

With the ocean in the background, I instruct the boys to stand with their backs toward me, legs spread widely, and their feet touching. Audrey’s body toward me, legs spread too with her body between the twins and her feet in the middle between each boys’ feet. This way, there’s a lovely tangle of legs where it’s difficult to see who’s who.

“Okay, Evan. You put your left arm in front of Audrey’s body to cover her boobs. Owen, you use your left hand and cover her vagina. A little higher, Evan…”

It takes me a while to get them in the correct position, but once everything is in place and Audrey puts her head between her shoulders and looks up at the sky, I start taking my pics. It takes me a few minutes to get them appropriately aligned in the middle of the frame and with the correct lighting, but the kids don’t move an inch, so the results are promising.

The next shot is with Audrey on her knees, looking intensely at the camera. The boys face each other, foreheads touching and their eyes closed. Audrey’s head obscures the boy’s dicks from view, and with Audrey covering her boobs with her hands, I’ve created another tasteful pic with three nude kids.

“Do you care if it’s a bit more… intimate?” I ask, looking at Audrey.

“No. Definitely not. What do you have in mind?”

“Do you?” I ask, looking at the boys but already knowing the answer.

They look wickedly at me with smiles splattered across their faces and wordlessly nod. I instruct Audrey to stand and face the camera with her legs spread about forty inches apart. Next, I tell Owen to stand to her left, facing her, with Evan on her other side.

“Owen?” I ask, and he looks at me. “Pussy or boob?”

“Huh?” he asks with a questioning face.

“Pussy!” Evan immediately responds.

“Evan gets pussy,” I chuckle.

“Think fast, Dude!” he laughs at his brother.

“Owen, you cup one of Audrey’s breasts,” I say, and his face turns into a mix of excitement and fear.

“Is that okay with you,” he asks, looking at Audrey.

“Of course, silly!” she smiles, takes his hand, and places it directly on her right boob.

I can almost hear Owen swallow, but his twitching dick shows he’s all too happy to touch his first tit.

“Evan, you grab her vagina firmly.”

Evan looks nervously at Audrey, and her slight nod is all the encouragement he needs. His hand slides down over her belly until his fingers slide between her legs and his hand is fully covering her pussy. I see his fingers move as he starts gripping his first-ever pussy.

“Ooohhh,” Audrey moans softly, and both boys look anxiously at me as if they did something wrong.

I just smile and wink, which puts them at ease. Then, seeing the twitching boners, I decide to turn up the heat.

“Audrey, now you grab their penises and point them toward your hips. If that’s okay with you guys, of course.”

“Uh-huh,” is all that comes out of Evan’s throat, which is more sound than his brother can produce, who simply nods.

I see a slight hesitation in Audrey’s moves, but when she realizes the opportunity she’s given, both her hands wrap around two similar dicks. The look on her face is priceless, and judging by the two moans, the twins like it a lot too.

“Perfect!” I say and start snapping away, and after a few moments, I decide to turn it up a notch.

“Can you guys start moving your hands a little?” I ask, and I’m greeted with three wide-eyed faces.

“I want it to look more natural. It’s way too static this way,” I smile and wink at Audrey.

I feel pretty worked up from watching them, so I figure this is an excellent way to push them a bit further. The faces turn to smiles, and Owen massages Audrey’s boob and pinches her nipple before I know it. Evan is working his hand up and down over Audrey’s pussy, and Audrey seems in haven while she’s basically jacking two young cocks simultaneously.

“This is awesome, guys! Just a few more,” I encourage them as I walk around to get the best pictures possible.

Soft, low moans and groans come from their throats. I am stiff as a board from watching this, and I take as many pictures as possible.

“That’s it. The Pyntar shots are done for today,” I call out.

Not surprisingly, the kids are a bit disappointed by this, and the looks on their faces say it all. Apparently, me calling quits is their cue to let go of each other and step back.

“Really? It was just starting to get fun!” Audrey whines.

“Uhm… yeah!” Owen smirks.

“Well… If you want, you can do more… uhm… sexy stuff,” I say and pretend I’m blushing, “these just won’t be regular Pyntar shots.”

“What do you mean?” Evan asks, a drop of precum glistening in the sun at the tip of his boner.

“Oh, I don’t know… Judging by your moans and looking at your faces, you must be pretty horny by now. So why don’t you lay down on the blanket and ‘do your thing’ there,” I say, emphasizing the last bit of the sentence.

Audrey looks at the boys, and not seeing them move makes her take the lead this time. She lies down on the middle of the blanket and spreads her legs a bit. Her hand immediately moves down to her pussy as she looks at the boys.

“Come on! It’ll be fun doing this together,” she smiles with a flush spreading across her face and upper chest.

This seems to snap Evan and Owen out of it. They quickly move over to the blanket too, and they each lay down on one side of Audrey. Owen looks down at Audrey’s hand between her legs and grips his boner. Evan looks at both of them, then at me, and asks, “You sure about this?”

“Go for it! Pretend I’m not here and do whatever feels natural.”

Owen didn’t wait for my confirmation and is slowly stroking his boner with his eyes fixed on Audrey’s body. Evan starts going to town too, and Audrey switches her gaze between the two identical boys in their intimate act of self-pleasure.

After a few moments, their moans start to increase, and I can see Audrey is entirely into it. I’m standing between her legs and move a bit closer. She doesn’t seem to notice, and I bring my camera within a few inches of her probing fingers and spread pussy lips.

It’s an extremely lewd picture, but judging by the pressure inside my pants, also a scorching hot one. Since I’m down at their feet, I snap close-up shots from both fist-wrapped boners, and no one seems to notice me doing this.

I feel a steady flow of precum oozing out of my rock-hard boner and an incredible urge to join their masturbation session. But the desire to document all this is stronger, so I just keep on snapping away.

“Oohhh… oohhh… I’m…” Owen starts moaning.

I quickly get closer to him and make sure to have his midsection in the frame. It starts just below his balls and ends around his belly button. In the background, Audrey’s hand on her pussy is blurry but clearly visible.

“Aaahhh…” Owen moans and holds his dick firmly at the base.

I press the shutter button, and my camera starts taking shot after shot in burst mode. The moment his cum starts shooting from his dick, I hear Evan moan too, but I don’t want to miss anything of this hot boy’s ejaculation.

Owen lets go of his dick, and I take a few more pics from his leaking boner and the three small puddles of cum on his belly.

Evan’s moans increase, so I get to my feet, adjust the frame and focus, and make sure I don’t miss his cum. This overview shot of the three young bodies with one of the boys shooting his sperm, and the other with traces of his own cum on his belly, is beyond hot. I notice Audrey has stopped the action between her legs and is focused on both shooting boys.

I know she must be horny as hell by now because I am too, and I haven’t even touched myself. After Evan is done cumming, he lays there panting like an old dog with his eyes shut. Audrey glances over to Owen, who lays next to her with a big grin on his face but still enjoying the afterglow of his orgasm.

Audrey winks at me, smirks, and moves her head down to Owen’s midsection. I hold the camera in front of my face again, so I won’t miss a thing from what Audrey is planning.

As she starts licking the cum from Owen’s body, he looks down at his belly with a surprised look on his face. But when Audrey grabs his dick and matter-of-factly slides her mouth over it, his eyes grow wide as saucers, and my camera doesn’t stop shooting.

“There. All clean,” she says to Owen after his dick pops free from her mouth.

When she moves over to Evan to do the same, Evan’s eyes fly open the moment she licks around his belly button and moans loudly when his dick enters her mouth.

After she’s done, she looks at me and asks, “Is it okay if I wanna do more?”

“Of course, Lil’ Bit! But they have to agree too,” I say and nod my head toward the two bronzed, naked and hard Adonises.

She doesn’t wait for an answer and throws herself at Owen. She gives him a firm hug and crawls on top of him with her legs on each side of his body and her wet pussy mere inches above his hard dick.

She leans down, looks him in the face, and starts kissing him pretty hardcore. I stand at their feet, and seeing Owen’s boner so close to Audrey’s pussy, makes me realize she’s not leaving this island as a virgin.

Evan is looking at the two, and he just smiles. There’s not even a hint of jealousy on his face, just lust and affection. Then, moments later, I see Audrey gripping her legs firmly around Owen’s hips, and she rolls to her left, taking Owen with her.

Audrey is back at her initial spot, but now Owen is lying on top of her in a traditional missionary position. The sexual tension in the air is palpable, but none of the three kids seem to notice. Audrey gently directs Owen’s face toward one of her tits, and once Owen gets the idea, his face moves down, and he latches on to Audrey’s left boob.

Once his lips close around her hard, pointy nipples, a big moan escapes her lips, and she pushes her chest forward. Encouraged by this, Owen starts alternating between her left and right boob, and his whole body wiggles on top of Audrey.

By now, Owen’s dick is a bit further away from Audrey’s pussy, but it’ll only take a little movement to line him up. So I decide to keep standing at their feet to have the best seat in the house. I keep snapping some pictures, and as Evan starts moving too, I focus on his face.

Audrey looks to her right and sees Evan closing in. She grabs Owen’s head to urge him on to keep sucking her tits, and she turns her head toward Evan, and they start kissing furiously.

Evan turns to his side and needs a place to put his arm. So he moves it on top of his brother’s back but pulls back the moment he realizes it’s his brother. I laugh inwardly at this and figure we need to quickly do something about this apprehension. It isn’t the time or place to do it now, but I want to see these two get busy too at one time, but I know we need to take it slowly at the moment.

After a few minutes of this hot action, Audrey and Evan stop kissing, and she looks down at the tit-sucking boy. A sly smile appears in the corner of her mouth, and she starts pulling at Owen’s hair. He looks up at her and immediately gets the idea. He moves up on Audrey’s body to start kissing her again.

I zoom in between their legs, and as his dick inches closer and closer to her pussy, I feel a tingle in my balls and realize my precum is oozing out in a steady flow. When Owen’s dick slides up over Audrey’s dripping pussy, both kids moan loudly into each other’s mouths. Audrey’s hands grab both his ass cheeks, and she squeezes them tightly.

Owen’s dick slides back down, and I can see its underside is coated with Audrey’s juices. He instinctively slides back up, but the top of his dick gets caught in Audrey’s entrance. The moment this happens, he stops and immediately sits back on his feet, leaving Audrey with a questioning look on her face.

Owen gets up, and I can see tears forming in his eyes, but I don’t have a clue why. He steps back, and as a tear flows down his cheek, he stammers, “I… I didn’t mean to… I wasn’t… I’m sorry, Audrey!”

Audrey props herself up on her elbows and looks questionably at Owen. I step in, put a hand around his shoulder, and hold him close to me.

“You didn’t do anything wrong,” I softly say to him.

“But… I was about to… fuck her!” he whispers back, already a bit calmer.

“Yeah. You were,” Audrey says and smiles at the troubled boy.

“See?” Owen responds and looks at me with big eyes.

“But I want you to fuck me!” Audrey continues, alternating her look between the twins.

“You do?” Owen says as I feel his shoulders relax.

I let go of Owen and step a bit closer to Audrey. She smiles broadly, and the look on the boys’ faces is one of disbelief.

“Yeah. Audrey and I talked about it, and as long as everyone is doing this out of their free will and no one is forced, I don’t see why you guys shouldn’t do it.”

“Really?” both boys reply simultaneously.

“Haha! Really!” Audrey laughs. “It’s my first time too, and I know you’ll be careful and won’t hurt me.”

“Of course we won’t hurt you!” Owen exclaims, and I notice his dick has gone soft.

“You’re good. Don’t worry! And uh… I know I want to have sex with you!” Evan says excitedly. “You, Dude?” he asks his brother.

“I… uh… yeah. Me too!” Owen replies, a little more hesitant.

“You wanna continue, or do you want me to go first?” Evan asks, his boner twitching with anticipation.

Owen looks down at his soft dick and then at his brother’s. Audrey has an ‘I don’t care’ look on her face and is beaming with anticipation.

“You do it, Dude. You’re the oldest, so I guess it’s your birthright,” he chuckles.

As Evan scoots over to Audrey and settles his body between her legs, she extends her arms toward Owen and says, “Come here!”

Owen gets on his knees next to Audrey, and they hug tightly. Audrey kisses him firmly on his lips while Evan has the decency to wait for them to finish.

“Will you hold my hand? I’m a bit nervous,” she softly asks Owen after they break their kiss.

Owen grabs her hand as his brother lowers himself down on top of Audrey’s body. I position myself in a spot where I can see the penetration and keep a good look at Audrey’s face to check on how she’s doing.

“Now what?” Evan asks insecurely after laying his lower body down on Audrey’s but keeping his torso away from her with his hands on the blanket.

“Just hug, kiss, and rub your bodies against each other. You’ll both know when you’re ready. Just take your time,” I say soothingly.

Evan lowers his face and starts kissing Audrey. She puts her free hand on his back but quickly moves it down to cup his firm little ass.

As Evan’s dick slides up and down over Audrey’s soaking wet, slippery pussy, they start moaning loudly. After a few moments of this, Audrey’s hand leaves Evan’s ass and moves between them, where she grabs Evan’s dick. I see her lining him up while Evan holds still and sucks in a breath when his dickhead touches the entrance of Audrey’s pussy. I quickly take a few pics before saying, “Push it in slowly, Evan. And try to relax, Lil’ Bit!”

I feel torn between two feelings. Watching these preteen kids lose their virginities is extremely hot and sexy. But my inner caretaker wants to protect Audrey from it. Thankfully, my mind tells me there’s no need to worry. Audrey wants this, and the boy taking her virginity is lovely and caring. So I keep telling myself there’s no need to worry.

As I watch Evan’s butt muscles tighten, his twelve-year-old cock slowly slides inside Audrey’s equally preteen pussy.

“Oohhh!” I hear both kids moan.

Audrey’s hand is back on squeezing Evan’s ass, and Owen is watching wide-eyed at what’s happening in front of him.

“I feel you slide in… Ahhhh!” Audrey moans while panting heavily and spreading her legs even further.

“Oohhhh… this… I… ohhh, Audrey!” Evan grunts.

I see he’s all the way inside Audrey’s pussy now, and he’s holding perfectly still. I quickly take close-up shots from between their legs where their genitals are merged into one.

“I… oohhh…” Audrey pants.

As I get up to take pictures of their faces, Evan looks at me and asks between pants, “Do I move it out now?”

“Yeah. But not completely out. Leave the tip inside. And then back in,” I smile, glad to assist these wonderful kids during their first intercourse.

Owen is still holding on to Audrey’s hand, which is adorable, but I signal with my head to let it go and softly say, “Let them enjoy this together. I’ve got a feeling you’re next.”

Audrey’s look is a bit unfocused, and her mouth is slightly open, which are both good signs. All the time, I kept one eye on Audrey’s face to see how she’s doing, but it’s clear she’s enjoying every second of it up until now.

After hearing me talking to Owen, she looks at him and nods. But before she can say anything, her eyes cross, and another loud moan escapes her lips.

I look down and see Evan already pushed back and is all the way inside her again. I watch him move and see he’s moving in and out very slowly. The look on Audrey’s face is one of pure bliss, but I can also see a hint of frustration.

“You can move faster. You won’t break her,” I say as I look at him, following a drop of sweat from his forehead down his cheek.

“I can?” he asks, looking down at Audrey.

“OH YES! PLEASE!” she almost shouts.

Needing no more encouragement, Evan starts picking up the pace, slapping his pelvis hard against Audrey’s. Seeing their bare pubes mash together, I know I have to take shots of that too. So I put my camera in front of my face, and I take a series of burst shots of three in-and-out motions from Evan.

But hearing him moan, I know he won’t last much longer, so I take my position to take shots of both their faces when he cums inside a girl for the very first time.

“Oh… oh… oh… AAHHH!” Evan shouts and pushes firmly inside Audrey for one last time, where he holds perfectly still.

It doesn’t take a genius to realize what’s happening, and I’m recording it all with my camera. Audrey looks up at Evan with a big grin across her face, but I see she isn’t cumming yet. As Evan’s ass cheeks relax, I see him catching his breath, and as he opens his eyes, a huge grin spreads across his face too.

“That was AWESOME!” he exclaims and gives Audrey a tender kiss on her lips.

“Yeah! This is amazing!” Audrey says and looks all hyped at me.

“You gotta try it too, Dude!” Evan says while looking at his brother.

When he realizes what he’s saying, he glances down at Audrey with a guilty look on his face and stammers, “I mean… if that’s okay with you, of course…”

“Yeah! Of course! Move over, Evan!” Audrey says, nodding furiously.

I look at Owen, and I’m glad to see he’s ready for it. His young dick stands up proudly from his groin, and his nervousness seems to be gone. Evan slides back on the blanket, and his glistening dick has gone a little soft, but not by much.

As Owen crawls between Audrey’s spread legs, she extends her arms to give him another firm hug. Owen gets the hint, lays himself down on her, and they passionately kiss each other. His hips are grinding again, and his hard dick is inches away from Audrey’s opening.

This time, he doesn’t waste any time and starts humping against her. I see Audrey’s flushed face, and within seconds, she reaches down between their bodies to line up the second dick within minutes that’s ready to enter her.

“Ready?” she asks with a hoarse voice while placing her hands on his butt.

Evan sits down next to me, and his glistening, half-hard dick looks delicious. It takes me a bit of willpower to prevent me from licking it clean, but the spectacle in front of us is enough to keep me from molesting this wonderful boy.

“Just do it, Dude!” Evan says with a comforting voice.

“Oooohhhhh!!” Owen moans as he starts sliding in.

His tight butt pushes down, and I scoot over to get another pic of young, joined genitals. Since Owen paid attention when his brother lost his virginity, he starts pulling back once he’s completely inside. This makes for another great series of pics. Right then and there, I realize that watching preteen kids fuck for the first time in their lives is something I’ll never grow tired of. Despite this realization, I know that my main focus is documenting how another young boy loses his virginity.

Before I know it, he’s pistoning in and out of Audrey’s pussy, and as their bare pubes slap against each other, loud moans come from both their throats. Owen lasts a bit longer than his brother, but after a little over a minute, I hear low grunts coming from his throat and the force of his thrusts increases.

But when I look at Audrey, I see a familiar look on her face. As Owen pushes in firmly for his last thrust, I see her eyes cross, and her body shakes.

“AAAHHHH!!” she practically screams and digs her fingertips firmly in Owen’s ass cheeks.

“HUHHH…” is the low groan coming from Owen’s throat.

I take close-up shots of Owen’s face as his orgasm hits him. The look on his face is absolutely priceless, and I feel a sense of pride and gratitude for being able to witness and document this.

“This is hot!” Evan whispers beside me, and I notice he’s hard again, wishing I was still his age.

“Yeah!” I whisper back and continue taking pictures.

Owen buries his head between Audrey’s neck and shoulder, and they both lay there panting heavily as they try to regain their breaths.

“Oh! I feel some sperm leaking out!” Audrey giggles.

I quickly move between their legs and take the best pictures of the entire session. Owen’s dick is buried inside Audrey’s pussy. Above his tight ballsack and around his dick, some sperm leaks out, dribbling toward Audrey’s ass, and some drip on the blanket.

“Are you okay?” Owen asks after a few moments.

“I’m more than okay!” Audrey exclaims, hugs Owen, and indicates Evan to join them.

As the three of them hug each other, I make sure to capture this affectionate moment of joy between them. After a few moments, Owen pulls back and lies down next to Audrey. Evan joins him on her other side, and as they lay there relaxing in the shade, I snap the last pic of the session and sit down on the blanket.

“How was it, Lil’ Bit?”

“It’s absolutely amazing! It didn’t hurt AT ALL! They were careful. I do feel a bit stretched down there, but in a good way. And it’s even better than when you eat me out!” she blabbers on, holding her hand in front of her mouth the moment she realizes what she said.

I glance over at both boys, and they just smile. Then, Owen winks at me and says, “We figured you did some of this together. And I get it… she’s just too cute.”

“Yeah… uhm… we’ll… you know you can’t talk about all this, right?” I ask, feeling a bit of panic about it.

“Of course! Don’t worry, Mr. H. Your secret is safe with us!” Evan says reassuringly.

“Yeah. You’re the coolest guy we know, so just chill, okay?” Owen adds.

“Thanks, guys! Who’s hungry?” I ask, trying to change the subject and not make a big fuss about their first fucks.

The kids get dressed as I put my camera gear in my bag, and we grab our stuff. The three of them are chatting excitedly about how it felt and how much they liked it. But once we clear the line of trees and walk toward the cabin, their conversation is back to video games and movies they like, as if nothing weird has happened.

* * *

“The shower is free,” Audrey says, walking in while drying her hair.

Evan gets up, and as he walks by Audrey, he openly checks out her naked body, which causes Audrey to smile seductively.

We’re sitting on the porch with a table filled with dirty dishes. We’ve had an excellent spaghetti and meatball dinner, which was gratefully devoured by the four of us. I drank almost four glasses of white wine during dinner, which is more than I usually drink. But figuring it’s a sort of holiday and the chill vibe I’m getting from the kids and the island, I figured I could do this for once. I’m feeling relaxed, and as I watch the beach, the ocean, and the setting sun, I feel privileged to be here with these three amazing kids.

I’m in my swimming trunks and a shirt, Owen put on his underwear after his shower, but I think he’s regretting it when he sees Audrey staying naked. Surprisingly, there’s absolutely no one on the beach at this time of day, so I don’t care how the kids are dressed.

“Sooo… you ate her out…” Owen says out of the blue, and a big grin is plastered across his face.

I feel a slight panic building up inside, but luckily, Audrey comes to the rescue.

“Yeah. He did. And I gave him a blowjob. It’s fantastic!” she says without any expression other than compassion for me on her face.

“I thought so… I want to learn how to do that too,” Owen responds.

I simply smile, but Audrey sees an opportunity, so she says, “If you want to learn how to do more sex stuff, you can try it with me. Scott can help us if we have questions.” she says extremely enthusiastically.

“Really! Can I?” Owen says surprised, and looks at me.

“Like I said earlier, as long as everyone involved is okay with it, I don’t see a problem,” I respond, glad we’re not talking about me eating out Audrey anymore.

“I want to learn everything!” Owen says like an absolute stud with the emphasis on everything and asks, “What else can we do?”

I see him looking at me and see Audrey’s questioning expression too. So I figure I might as well be honest and name it all.

“There’s intercourse, or fucking, obviously. There’s oral like a blowjob or eating out a girl. Anal, of course. You can do a threesome…” I say and see Evan coming onto the porch, naked as the day he was born.

“Or foursome…” he simply says, looking at me as he sits down at the table with his damp hair.

“Of course!” Audrey says as if she just had an epiphany.

“Yeah!” Owen adds. “You should join us!”

“Uhm… I can’t… I mean… you are… uhm…” I stammer.

“Oh! You promised you’d think about it!” Audrey whines.

“Look,” I say seriously to all three of them, “I’m basically Audrey’s parent in the eyes of the law. And you guys are at an age where no judge will have mercy on me. So I just can’t,” I say as I try to be as serious as possible.

Owen looks questionably at me, and after a few moments, he says, “But no one but the four of us will know.”

“Yeah!” Evan chips in, “I think it’ll be fun, and you can teach us a whole lot! I’d love to do all the stuff you just said!”

“See?” Audrey says with a big smirk across her face.

“I don’t know…” I try, but my straining boner is betraying me as these three kids are practically begging me to have sex with them.

I know I should say no. My mind tells me I shouldn’t do it. But my heart tells me something else. I glance over at Audrey and realize I can still protect her, even when we’ve had sex. It feels like a wall crumbling down around my inhibitions, and as more of that wall goes down, the more I feel the excitement of joining these three kids’ sexual development.

I remember the joys I’ve had with Glenn and how it helped me become the person I am today. And when that realization hits me, I make a deal with myself to keep everything as safe, pleasant, and open as Glenn did with me. With that promise in the back of my mind, I can practically hear the last bit of the wall crumble, and a smile forms around my mouth.

As Audrey sees this, she gets up, and as she straddles my waist, both boys get up too and stand on either side of me. I see Owen dropping his boxers as Evan gently guides my right hand and lays it on his semi-hard dick.

I feel his dick grow to full mast in my hand, and I can’t help but squeeze it. As I look up at his face, he just smiles hornily down at me. While Audrey presses her pussy down on my now rock-hard boner, Owen grabs my hand and guides it to his boner. Once I realize the situation I’m in, with two preteen boners in my hands, and a naked girl squirming in my lap, I feel the very last of my inhibitions float away.

“Alright. But not here out in the open,” I hear myself whisper.

“YEAH!” both boys say simultaneously and high-five each other.

“YESSS!” Audrey says loudly and kisses me hard on my lips, grinding herself firmly against my mid-section.

I can’t stop fiddling with the two boners in my hands, and for a moment, nobody moves. Then, reluctantly let go of Evan and Owen’s rock-hard and amazing dicks, and gently push the naked preteen girl from my lap. The moment I get to my feet, Audrey and Owen start working on my trunks, but I push them away long enough so that we can all get inside the cabin and close the door behind us. Small hands attack me again, and my swimsuit lies crumbled at my feet within seconds. Meanwhile, Evan is taking off my shirt, and as he throws it into a corner, I’m as naked as the kids, and another boner joins the team.

Audrey starts walking toward our bedroom but is quickly chased by the twins who run by her. And as they round the corner, I see their boners flopping around, which causes Audrey to giggle.

They jump on the bed, and as I enter the bedroom, they’ve turned around and sit on the bed on their knees, looking expectantly at me.

“What can we do?” Owen asks.

“I wanna do everything!” Audrey says, eyeing the boners around her.

“Can we do anal?” Evan asks practically at the same time.

Owen looks questionably at his brother, who blushes once he realizes what he said. But he keeps looking at me, and I can see he isn’t kidding and seems interested in it.

“We’ll do it all. Don’t worry,” I respond with a warm smile and wink toward Evan. “Probably anal too, and I promise you’ll love it! I’m not sure if it’ll fit, but just the trying will be fun!”

“Okay…” is Owen’s tentative response, but I see him already opening up to the idea.

“Let’s do blowjobs!” Audrey exclaims after a few moments, drops to her knees in front of Evan, and motions me to do the same with his brother.

This is it. I’m going to do it, and I can’t wait to have this hard, young cock in my mouth. So I drop to my knees too, sit shoulder to shoulder with Audrey, and look at the throbbing boner in front of my eyes. Then, without hesitation and without counting down, Audrey and I dive in at the exact same moment.

I grab Owen’s boner by its base, open my mouth and let it slide in between my lips. The moment my tongue hits the underside of his glans, I instinctively know I did the right thing. The low moans above us bring a smile to my face. I glance over at Audrey, and I can see her smiling too, as she’s checking me out from the corner of her eyes. This only lasts a few moments, and as I’m getting into blowing this young, hot boy, I want nothing more than to feel his cum shoot in my mouth and swallow everything he has to give to me.

I’m really getting into it, and as my lips rub over the stiff shaft with low moans and grunts coming from the boy above me, Audrey lets go of Evan’s cock. The smacking sound of her mouth leaving his cock, and the deep sigh coming from Evan makes me glance over at the two kids to my left. I’m not ready to let this young, tasty cock leave my mouth, so I slightly turn my head and let my tongue caress his glans.

“Time to switch!” Audrey exclaims excitedly and gets to her feet.

Only because I know I’ll have another hard cock in my mouth within seconds, I let Owen’s dick slip from my mouth. I scoot over to my left, where I see my bag standing against the wall and within reach.

“Lie down on your back,” I say to Evan as I reach inside.

After a bit of probing around, I find what I’m looking for. I pull out the can of coconut oil and put it down on the floor between Evan’s feet, who’s oblivious to my actions.

I don’t want to waste any time, so I grab his spit-covered glistening boner and slip my mouth around it. Then, with my free hand, I quietly pop off the cap from the can of oil and scoop up a glob of it on my fingers.

As my head bobs up and down, I slowly move my finger toward Evan’s anus. I increase my tongue action to distract him a bit. The moment my slick finger touches his anus, it immediately slides in a little, which causes Evan to moan loudly, and his boner twitches furiously in my mouth.

“Ooohhhh!!” he moans and presses his ass down on my slippery finger.

“More?” I simply ask as I take my mouth off his dick just long enough to ask this and immediately put my mouth around it again.

“Yessss. Oooohhh yesss!” Evan groans.

Judging by how relaxed his sphincter already is, I figure I can use two fingers easily. So I quickly extract my finger to scoop up another glob but with two fingers this time, which causes Evan to groan from emptiness.

The moment I press my two fingers against him, he’s basically begging me to stick them inside. So I keep my tongue action active and slowly but steadily slide two fingers inside this angelic boy.

“Hhmmm…” he groans, and I feel his muscles relax under my probing fingers.

This boy is a natural! I don’t have to tell him to relax or push back. I slide in easily, and before I know it, I’m all the way inside. As I start moving them in and out, his hard dick twitches in my mouth each time I hit his prostate. So I focus on that and keep lapping away under and over his glans.

When his hands grab my hair and his moans turn into high-pitched grunts, I know he’s cumming. I can’t wait to taste him, so I increase both speed and intensity as he starts lifting his ass off the mattress.

There’s one last loud grunt, and as his fingers dig into my skull, I feel his hard cock fatten even more, and the moment his ass muscles clench tightly around my fingers, I feel the sweet, young boy nectar fill my mouth.

Four spurts of watery cum fill my mouth. It isn’t too much to handle, and I let the sweet and light fluid go through my mouth as I savor its taste. Moments later, his body starts relaxing, and as his ass hits the mattress again, only a slow dribble of cum comes out of his cock, which I eagerly lap up.

I reluctantly swallow it and retract my fingers from his ass, making sure to stimulate his prostate as much as I can. Evan isn’t entirely with us yet, so I glance over at the action to my right.

Audrey’s head is bobbing up and down on Owen, and judging by his moans and the similar way he lifts his ass off the bed, I realize he’s close. I move over, kneel behind Audrey and start pinching her nipple while my other hand searches for her sopping pussy.

Audrey doesn’t react and just keeps on sucking Owen. I rub my dick between her ass cheeks as I start fingering her while looking over her shoulder at one heck of an erotic sight. After a few more seconds, Owen’s hands dig into Audrey’s hair, and as his high-pitched moan fills the room, it’s clear he’s cumming too.

I let Audrey suck him dry, and I slow down my action on her pussy and tits. I glance over at Evan and see him looking at his brother’s orgasm, with a sheepish grin all over his face. I get up and lie down on the bed between the twins, thinking about what to do next. I’m still uncertain if I should fuck Audrey, but judging by how easy Evan opened up his boy pussy and how eager he is to do anal, I make up my mind to at least fuck him, and maybe his brother too.

I feel a hand wrap around my boner as I’m contemplating this. I glance down and see Evan looking down at my dick and sizing it up. I look at him and smile.

“Are you sure it’ll fit?” he asks with a bit of uncertainty as he squeezes my boner.

“Yeah. It’ll definitely fit. I had the same doubts when Glenn and I did it for the first time.”

I feel the bed move, and Audrey squeezes herself between Owen and me. Owen clearly recovered from his orgasm minutes ago because he wastes no time and starts feeling up Audrey’s tits, which causes her to purr softly.

“Why don’t you try it, Evan?” she asks with an eager grin across her face.

“You sure?” he asks quietly, looking me in my face.

“You’ll love it! And if it hurts, we’ll just stop and do something else. No worries!” I soothingly say.

“Uhm… can I… uhh…” Owen stammers with a blush spreading out over his face and upper chest.

Audrey looks at him and immediately gives him a tight hug. “Of course you can!” she chirps, “right, Scott?”

“Sure! We just need to lube you up too!”

“But… isn’t it… gay?” he stammers again.

“So?” Audrey asks as if Owen just asked the stupidest question ever. “You can always stick it in me again later, so I doubt it being too gay!”

That seems to do the trick. Owen simply nods and asks, “How do I lube up?”

Without answering, I drop to my knees and grab the can of coconut oil. A few loud moans and a couple of minutes later, I think he’s lubed up enough. I glance over at Audrey and Evan and see they decided to kill time by Frenching and groping around. As they’re occupied, I figure I might as well lube Evan up even more, which he, judging by his moans, doesn’t mind too much.

“Get on all fours. It’ll be easier that way,” I say to Evan, who immediately breaks the kiss and gets on his hands and knees.

“Can I watch?” Audrey asks as she gets to her knees.

“Of course, Lil’ Bit,” I say, as I realize I’m tremendously turned by both the audience as devirginizing the twins’ asses.

“And what do I do?” Owen asks, and he wants to be fucked badly, too, judging by how he looks.

“Why don’t you do it too? I’ll switch between you two.” I turn to Audrey. “Lil’ Bit?”

“What is it?”

“Sit between them on the bed, and… uhm… make sure their… dicks get some attention,” I smile, knowing how much she likes to handle a dick, let alone two at once.

She sits between the boys and has a great view of what I’m about to do. Her hands reach down, and judging by the moans, grips their dicks and starts toying with them. As she’s smiling from ear to ear, I grab the oil and lube up my rock-hard and twitching dick.

“Ready?” I ask, and after a timid nod from Evan, I press my glans against his rosebud and whisper, “Try to relax and push back a little. If you want me to stop, just say the word, okay?”

After another wordless nod, I start applying more pressure. With some effort, my dickhead slips in and is engulfed by his warm rectum. I know the worst part is already over, so I ask, “You okay?”

“Ohhh… yeah! This is… hmmm…” he moans, and I see Audrey’s eyes wide open, and her hands stop moving.

A simple nod from my head gets her moving again, and I can see Owen glancing at his brother to size him up. Seeing him smile is all the encouragement I need to push and slide in further. I grab his boyish hips to steady myself and feel his ass muscles clench and relax as I move in. This boy is a pro, and I almost can’t believe he’s never done this before.

It takes me a few in and out motions during my entrance, but before long, I’ve got no more dick left to slide in and feel my balls rest against his small, hairless sack.

“This is it,” I hear myself pant. “Still good?”

“Oohhh… yeah! This is… hmm…” he moans, clearly enjoying it.

“This is so hot!” Audrey whispers as she is slowly jacking him off, and her eyes focused on where our bodies merged.

“I’m going to fuck you now,” I say to Evan as I gently squeeze his ass.

“Yessss… please!”

As I slide out, I feel my dickhead rub against something. His loud moan and clenching muscles make me realize it’s his prostate. I’ve never felt it so prominent before in my life, but it’s a big turn-on knowing how much we both enjoy this.

As the boiling inside my balls is building, I realize I need to do something to prevent myself from popping off inside this fabulous preteen ass. A quick glance at the other exposed boy gives me an idea.

“It’s your brother’s turn,” I hoarsely say.

As I slide out, Evan moans a bit, but seeing the way he looks excitedly at his brother, shows love and excitement for both of them.

“This is fucking amazing!” he says to his nervous-looking brother.

I lube up some more and stand behind Owen, with my glistening glans pressed against his opening. He inhales sharply at the contact, so I grab him by his small waist and say, “Remember to relax, and you’re fine!”

Obviously lost for words, he nods with his eyes locked with his brother. Audrey starts milking him faster to distract him, which is my cue to enter another tight butthole. Looking down at his bronzed ass and seeing my stiff dick slowly sliding in almost makes me cum. But during the switch, my level of arousal dropped enough to keep me going.

After a few minutes, I’m fully buried into Owen, who moans and nods furiously at his twin brother.

“Fuck! This… ahhh… is… ahh… fucking ama… zing…”

As I move in and out, I feel the same spot hitting my glans. Each time I rub against it, the moans get louder. I feel Owen’s ass tighten, and I want to postpone his orgasm. So I switch back to his brother and enter him with ease, and another loud moan fills the room.

Audrey’s action is down to a simple massage. That much is clear from my point of view. And I don’t think either boy minds. Because when I pick up the pace with Evan, he starts pushing his ass back at me with each inward thrust, making our fucking session more intense.

I switch back to Owen, and after I fucked him for about a minute, and I’m sliding back in his brother, I’m amazed by my stamina. But I blame that on my focus on making it a pleasant first fuck for the boys and the amount of wine I drank already.

“Ahh! Ahh! Ahh! I’m… ohh… ohhh…” Evan moans, and the tension of his ass muscles increases to a point it’s almost too tight.

I keep pistoning in and out when he suddenly freezes and lets out a high-pitched groan. I feel his prostate move on the underside of my dick, and the “Ahh… yesss!” from Audrey is the definitive confirmation he’s cumming.

I let him enjoy his orgasm for a few moments before I pull out and sink into Owen, where my balls slap against his. He’s clearly on the edge too, because it only takes me about ten or eleven fucks for him to grunt with the same high-pitched moan. It’s almost a carbon copy of his brother’s cum, and I hold perfectly still to allow him the same satisfaction.

Both boys collapse on the bed with their asses sticking up. I grab some wet wipes, discretely but thoroughly clean my dick, and throw them in the trash can. Audrey is looking at me with the horniest face I’ve seen on her up until now, and her pleading eyes say it all.

“Will you… stick it in me now? Please?” she beggingly whispers, causing both boys to turn their heads and look expectantly at me.

The hormones must be clouding my brain because I hear myself whisper, “Lie on your back, Lil’ Bit,” and I step forward, gripping my boner at the base.

“Really?” she asks excitedly as she moves back on the bed, lies her head on the pillow, and looks at me with an expression I haven’t seen before.

The twins move back a bit and almost simultaneously pop up their heads on their hands, looking down at Audrey. As I’m looking at the gloriously sexy young girl on the bed looking expectantly at me, I suppress the urge to simply fuck her brains out. I know I have to be tender and gentle to make our first time together a pleasurable and memorable experience.

“Really!” I reply warmly as I smile at her excited face.

Her smile quickly turns into a horny and serious look. The eagerness is so apparent that even a blind man can see it.

“Spread your legs, Lil’ Bit,” I whisper as I get on the bed.

The moment she spreads her legs, I get between them and lie my body gently on hers. I make sure the tip of my dick is touching her pussy lips, and the weight of my body presses it down between her folds.

I look down at her anxious face and feel nothing but love for this wonderful girl. As I lean down to kiss her, she wraps her arms around me and slightly opens her mouth. The moment our lips touch, it’s like a bolt of electricity shoots through me.

The moments our tongues make contact, we both moan into each other’s mouths, and my hips start moving involuntarily. We kiss passionately, and every time my dickhead touches her clit, Audrey moans louder and digs her finger deeper into my back.

I lift my face, reach down to grab my throbbing boner, and look her in the eyes. For the first time in my life, I feel like I’m communicating with someone on a spiritual level instead of with words. She doesn’t even have to nod for me to know she’s ready. I can see it in her eyes.

So as I line myself up, I make sure to keep eye contact. The moment I push and feel the folds of her pussy give way, she sucks in a deep breath. I freeze for a second, but I push further when I see she’s okay. As I’m about halfway inside her wonderfully soft and velvety love canal, her eyes cross, she arches her back and lifts her head back.

“Ooohh…” is the deep, low grunt that comes from her throat.

Her fingers grab me even firmer as I keep sliding in. I don’t have to pull back even once to make the entrance easier on her. She is so wet and slippery that there’s almost no resistance, only a firm grip around my hard dick.

The moment I’m in all the way, I feel the tip of my dick touch her inside. And as my balls touch her ass, they start to tingle with anticipation. Audrey tries focusing on me, and once she manages to do that, she smiles and whispers, “Finally… aaahh…”

Right at that moment, I just know I’m doing the right thing. Despite our pseudo-father-daughter relationship, despite her age, and despite the fear of molesting her, I just know. And I know this isn’t a fluke but a deep, soulmate-like connection we’re building.

I manage to stay perfectly still, and I lean down to kiss her again. This time, she returns the kiss with passionate enthusiasm. She keeps moaning, and her probing tongue is almost violently moving around.

“Ahh… do it, Scott!” she moans between kisses, still unable to use dirty words, even now.

I slowly pull back, and I feel her pussy muscles gripping my dick in an attempt to keep me in. But as I push back in and she arches her back again, the grip around my dick feels even better.

“Oohhh…” we moan simultaneously.

I know that the twins are watching us in the back of my head, but due to this intense psychological connection during our first fuck, it’s tuned out completely, and the only two people in the world that matter are Audrey and me.

I keep a slow and steady rhythm, so I know I can last a little longer. But judging by the trashing young girl below me, I don’t need to last very much longer.

I place one hand against her cheek as I keep using slow but firm thrusts. Her eyes lock on mine the moment I do this, but her gaze is off. Her shallow, ragged breath is also a clear indicator of what is about to happen.

The familiar buildup is snowballing inside my body, and I’m approaching my peak at lightning speed. I push with another firm thrust, and by now, only a low gurgle comes out of her mouth, and her pussy clenches hard around my cock. I slowly pull back and slide in firmly where my pubic bone mashes with hers. And that is when it happens.

“Aaaahhh! Aaahhhh! Ooooohhhh!” Audrey almost screams.

Her fingers dig into my back so deep it hurts. Her clenching pussy was tight before my last push, but now it feels like she’s milking me. I know I have to stop to give her time to enjoy it, but I’m one thrust away from cumming myself, so I slam it in one last time before my balls unload themselves, and I coat the insides of this wonderful girl.

This last thrust apparently did something to her too, because she’s grinding her pussy hard against me and her head keeps moving from left to right, and her body moves so violently, it’s almost like she’s having a seizure.

But this all barely registers as I feel spurt after spurt leave my dick and fill her up with it. My dickhead is pressed against her cervix, and in my head, I picture my cum shooting straight into her womb. This all adds to my orgasm, and I feel like I’m floating weightless in outer space.

After I come down a bit and look at the pure bliss on Audrey’s face, I slowly move my barely softening dick in and out to extend her pleasure. I’m not aiming for another orgasm, just a prolongation of her current one. Judging by her movements, this works flawlessly, but eventually, it dies down, and she looks at me with a more focused look on her face.

“I feel your… stuff inside,” she whispers.

I can’t help but smile and just nod. “I feel you gripping my penis,” I reply after her muscles contract softly.

“Really?” she giggles and clenches them again.

“Oohhh…” I moan to emphasize the point.

Audrey’s hands move up my back, and she looks at me with a deep, loving look.

“I love you!”

I can’t help it. I’m totally over the moon and hopelessly in love with this wonderful girl. Deep down, I knew this already, but now, right after our first lovemaking, I feel it strongly, and there’s no more denying it. So with all the love I have inside me, I softly say, “I love you too!”

I know, corny as hell, but so right at the moment. We tenderly start kissing each other, and after a few moments, I feel two boy bodies on either side of us, hugging us too in a big group hug.

“That was… sweet!” Evan whispers.

“Yeah, Dude! Sweet and hot!”

“Thanks!” I say without anything witty to say at that moment., “Let’s lie down, okay? Audrey is getting crushed this way.”

We all lie down on our backs and talk about what we have done so far. I’m thrilled to find out that all three of them feel free to talk about this subject. No more silly giggles when someone mentions a dick or something. They talk openly about what they like and what they wanna do. Eventually, the talk dies down a bit, and I notice Audrey has trouble keeping her eyes open. I see Evan yawning too, and I whisper a soft “Goodnight,” which is the cue for all of us to close our eyes and call it a day. And what a day!

Copyright 2022 – Jason Crow
All rights reserved

Ego amare negotiandi locos

P.S. The picture above this story is the one that started all this. This one gave me the inspiration for being the photographer behind the camera and all the possibilities that comes with it. Just so you know…

Here’s the download link to this chapter’s audio file: Link

But I recommend downloading the complete audio file (.m4a, .m4b or .MP3) for the best experience. There’s also an eBook in both the ePub and PDF format available for download here.
Click here to go to the Audio book/eBook page

La Isla de Aquinas – Chapter 14

La Isla de Aquinas

Chapter 14 – Come to the island

“This is amazing!” I said as Glenn, Gloria, and I entered the apartment.

I immediately ran over to the balcony to enjoy the view we had of the ocean. As the soft, warm breeze touched my skin and the sunset colored the sky red, I felt a weird calmness flow through my body.

“This view is great. Isn’t it, honey?” Gloria asked as she stood beside me on the balcony.

“Thank you guys SO much for taking me here with you!” I said and hugged Gloria tightly.

But the moment I realized I was hugging her tightly, I let go and stepped back a bit. “Sorry! I don’t want to hurt the baby,” I said, afraid she would be mad.

“Haha! Don’t worry, honey! It’s safe inside my belly. No need to worry that you’re going to hurt it.”

“Oh… I thought I’d…” I stammered and hugged Gloria tightly again.

“Right. Let’s finish unpacking. We’re invited over at Thiago’s for dinner. And believe me, you don’t want to miss that!” Gloria smiled.

So after we unpacked and I made the bed in my small room, we went out to Thiago. Glenn had rented a car so he could visit his old friends. Since it was a convertible, I insisted on driving with the top down. Glenn just smiled when Gloria pressed the button, and the roof automatically opened.

This was precisely how I always pictured a vacation. Having fun and doing all sorts of stuff you wouldn’t do at home. And all that with a nice, warm breeze in a new environment.

When we arrived at Thiago, a man looking about the same as Glenn came running with his arms spread and called out his name. The moment his body collided with Glenn, they hugged each other firmly with loud pads on their backs and shoulders.

Next, he greeted Gloria, and a woman joined him. After Glenn introduced me and I got hugged too, I learned that Thiago was Glenn’s best friend when they grew up. Finally, his wife, Maria, invited us over to the table where we had one of the best meals I ever had.

Glenn and Thiago shared a lot of childhood stories about all the mischief they did and got away with. All of them were having a good time, and I had to laugh at a lot of the funny stories too. Sometime during all of this, the conversation became more serious.

“If those idiots think they can take our island, they’re in for a treat!” Thiago said sternly.

“I know, T. But don’t do anything stupid, okay? I’m sure they’ll find a diplomatic solution and push back these Nicaraguans,” Glenn replied, and he sounded all serious now too.

I later learned that they barely avoided a full-blown civil war at that time by sending US troops to keep the peace. One of the outcomes of the peace negotiations was that a part of the island became a permanent part of Nicaragua

At the time, this didn’t register with me. I only noticed a lot of soldiers in the lesser part of the town and the graffiti sprayed on the buildings with all sorts of images I couldn’t place and text I couldn’t read.

I was getting pretty tired, and when Gloria saw me yawn, she announced it was time to head back to the apartment.

The following day was all about revisiting old friends. Again. And although these were all very friendly people, I was starting to get bored. So when we were sitting at the breakfast table the following morning, Gloria asked, “How about you and I doing something fun today while Glenn visits some more friends?”

“That sounds great!” I said enthusiastically, glad to do something else than being the fifth wheel on the wagon.

“An excellent plan!” Glenn said and looked at Gloria, “But is it okay if Scott and I do some shots on the beach for about one or two hours first? The light is fantastic this time of day.”

“Sure! That gives me time to plan something for us. Back here at ten?” Gloria asked with a twinkle in her eyes.

“Let’s go, Bud! We’re heading to the beach,” Glenn said as he got up and grabbed his camera bag from the cabin in the corner.

“Don’t I need my swimming trunks or something?”

“Nah. We don’t need them. But bring a beach towel just in case,” Glenn smiled and winked at me.

When we reached the beach entrance, Glenn pointed to the left. So after I took off my shoes and felt the dry sand between my toes, we started walking in that direction. Despite the already lovely weather, there weren’t many people on the beach. Before we started walking, I could see a couple and a man with his dog walking in the distance to our right, but other than that, we were alone.

To the left of us, old cabins were overlooking the ocean. The location was incredible, but these cabins looked old and worn. As far as I could see, none of them were occupied, which was a bit of a shame considering the fantastic spot on this beach.

“What’s with these cabins?” I asked Glenn.

“They were put here about a decade ago. But no one took care of them, so now they’re old and shabby.”

“Pitty,” I said.

“There’s the spot I was thinking about,” Glenn said after we walked some more and pointed toward a lush bush of tropical plants on the end of the beach, where the ocean crashed with mild waves at the shore.

“That looks nice!” I exclaimed, impressed by the tropical look I only saw in magazines up until now.

“I think it’s the most beautiful spot on the island,” Glenn said as he put down his camera bag.

As I put down the bag with the towel next to it, I asked, “What do you wanna shoot today?”

“I wanna do another Pyntar shoot today. But a little different than usual. Where most of these are single-shot images, I want to tell a story here,” he said, looking expectantly at me.

“Okay… and?” I asked, completely clueless about where this was going.

“On the island,” Glenn continued, “all beaches are clothing optional. You can be naked if you want to, but you don’t have to. I’ve seen families having fun on the beach completely naked, sitting next to another fully clothed group. And everything in between. No one cares.”

I must’ve looked stupid because he started laughing when Glenn looked at me. But, it didn’t make me feel uncomfortable at all because I knew he’d explain everything.

“Sorry, Bud. I guess I don’t make a lot of sense. I want to tell a story with multiple pictures. The story is about a boy on a beach,” he said, theatrically waving his hand to accentuate the location, “who discovers the joys of being naked outdoors. Or just in his undies,” Glenn quickly added.

“Oh,” I simply said, envisioning the shoot in my head already.

“That’s up to you, of course,” Glenn said, trying to size me up about being naked.

“So I need to do some acting for this shoot?”

“Acting is a big word. I want to tell a story with pictures this time. It’ll be a first for me too.”

“Sounds like fun! How do we do this?” I asked, excited to get going.

Glenn talked me through his plan, and after a few minutes, I walked toward the bush in my short blue sweat shorts and white t-shirt, with the bath towel around my neck. Glenn was behind me, snapping away already.

“Stop there and look around,” Glenn said while I was facing the ocean.

After a few pictures like this, Glenn told me to place the towel on the sand and to take off my shirt. Next, he asked to walk knee-deep into the ocean.

“Look at your pants. Try to look worried they’ll get wet,” Glenn instructed me as he was standing in the water next to me in his underwear and shirt.

I did just that and felt the tension inside build. I knew what was coming next, and I felt pretty excited. When I was back at the towel, I waited a few moments for Glenn to catch up and waited for further instructions.

“Slowly drop your sweats, Bud. I need to shoot both the pants and your face, so please take it slow.”

“Okay,” I mumbled, surprised that my dick was still soft.

After I kicked away my sweats, Glenn took a few close-up shots of the bulge in my tighty-whities.

“Look around shyly to check if no one is looking and hook your thumbs in the waistband,” is all I heard.

I did just that, and I felt incredibly naughty for what I was about to do. I didn’t know why, but I was still completely soft despite all this tension.

“Slowly pull them down…” Glenn softly said as he was snapping away.

The moment my dick was free from its confinement, I felt the warm breeze on it and realized how awesome it is to be naked on this beach.

After Glenn was done with the closeup from my dick, balls, and ass, he asked, “Can you stretch your body? That way, it’ll look like you’re enjoying this freedom even more.”

I turned my body toward the ocean, put my arms in the air, and stretched. Then, I casually wiggled my midsection so my dick was flopping gently from left to right.

“That’s awesome,” Glenn said to me. “Can you run around and do some exploring near these bushes?”

After pretending to play and discover, Glenn directed me to the ocean again. I got in, and with the water ending just below my balls, I looked into the distance. Glenn took his shots again, and as I went for a swim, he tried to follow me as far as possible. Eventually, I swam back toward him and almost touched the camera as I got closer.

“Lie down on the towel to let the wind and the sun dry you,” Glenn said as we walked out of the ocean.

“Do you want me to make my dick hard?” I asked as I looked down toward my shriveled dick and balls.

“Dick, huh? What happened to willie?” he chuckled.

“Michelle said I shouldn’t call it a willie anymore after… you know…”

“Haha! She’s right. You’ve got a real dick now! You’ve jerked, you’ve fucked, and you can shoot cum. Yeah. That sure qualifies as a dick to me,” Glenn said, ruffled my hair, and patted me on my butt.

“But do I?”

“Uhm… It would make some nice pictures if you decide to spank it…” Glenn smiled after he looked around and saw nobody even remotely close to us.

“We’ll see,” I smiled mischievously and walked over to the towel.

“Go for it,” Glenn said as he put the camera in front of his face.

I stood by the towel with my back toward Glenn. I stretched again and pretended to look around carefully. I already saw that we were completely alone at this end of the beach and felt my dick chub up a bit from the anticipation of what I was about to do. After a few moments, I kneeled and laid down on the towel on my back with my legs spread slightly and my hands folded behind my back. As I looked at the passing clouds and listened to Glenn’s camera clicking away, I let my mind drift to my actions with Michelle. The images of Michelle’s body below me quickly morphed into Becky’s naked body in front of my eyes, and I realized I was getting hard.

I noticed Glenn being close by to shoot as many pictures as possible of my growing member, which excited me even more. By the time I was fully hard, I was so horny that I just had to jack it. So as I gripped my hard dick and started sliding my fist up and down, I heard Glenn moan a soft, “Oh yeah…” and decided to give him a good show.

My right hand was finding a nice rhythm, but I wanted more this time. So I spread my legs further and let my left hand slide down between them. As my index finger started searching for my butthole, I saw Glenn move in the corner of my eye, and he walked over, so he looked up at me from between my legs. He got to his knees and moved even lower to a point where his camera was almost touching the sand.

Doing such a naughty act in a public place was an even bigger turn-on for me than I expected, and I realized I was starting to get close already. I let my finger press on my butthole and relaxed my muscles down there. This immediately caused the tip of my finger to enter me, and a surge of pleasure shot through me as it happened. I pressed down and felt my finger go even deeper until I touched a spot that sent off fireworks in my brain.

“OOHHHH!!!” I moaned loudly.

I sped up the motion of my right hand and started moving my finger in and out of my hole. As I did this, I heard myself moan and felt movement on the towel, realizing Glenn was taking all sorts of close-ups of my body during this wild jack-off session. But I didn’t care. I was so engrossed in jacking off I only paid attention to the good feelings in my lower body, with only the sound of the crashing waves resonating in my ears. Even if a marching band walked by, I probably wouldn’t even notice.

My fist and finger movement increased even more, and I felt I was about to cum. I wasn’t sure how I did it, but I managed to open my eyes and look straight into the camera and moaned, “I’m cumming…. Ohhhh… Shoot my… ahh… dick!”

Glenn’s camera moved away from my face and immediately focused on my dick. Then, with a last, loud moan, I felt the now-familiar movement inside my dick, and a moment later, I felt two warm drops of liquid land on my belly after my dick spasmed wildly in my gripping fist.

I needed some time to recover, but I had to remove my finger from my butt to relax more comfortably. So, with a deep sigh and a squishy sound, I retracted my finger, and I felt my anus and lower-body muscles relax. The warm wind over my body, the sound of the waves in the background, and the screaming seagull in the distance were so relaxing that I almost drifted off.

“That was awesome, Bud!” Glenn said as he sat down next to me on the towel, looking at my face and smiling.

I opened my eyes and smiled back. Then I looked down at my belly, where my softening dick was lying on my thigh, and I saw the two clear drops of cum. I scooped them up with my right index finger and brought it to my face. It looked very watery and not at all like Glenn’s cum. But I was extremely curious about the taste, so I opened my mouth, and the moment they activated my tastebuds, I was surprised by its taste. Glenn’s cum was salty and musky. But this was sweet and light.

“This tastes good!” I exclaimed, causing Glenn to chuckle.

“Yeah. Your cum tastes amazing!” he said and quickly moved his head down to lap up the remains my fingers didn’t pick up.

“That tickles!” I giggled as his tongue moved over my belly.

We sat there for a few more moments when Glenn asked, “You really like anal stimulation, don’t you?”

“I like what?”I asked, vaguely aware of what he was talking about.

“Sticking things up your butt,” he said bluntly while looking at me.

This caused me to blush a bit, and after a few moments, I just nodded.

“I told you before. There’s nothing wrong with that. I just want to warn you about what you stick inside. Look out for things with sharp edges. This might damage your insides. But stuff like a hairbrush handle or banana is perfectly fine. Just make sure you lube up and be careful.”

“Lube up? You mean like using grease or something?”

“Yeah. Something like that. Just make sure it’s based on natural ingredients and doesn’t contain any alcohol or other aggressive substances.”

“How do I know which is right?”

“When we get back home, I’ll buy the good stuff and give it to you, okay?”

“That’ll be great! Thanks.” I said and suddenly felt even more grateful for having Glenn in my life.

“I’ll also buy you a small dildo that’s made for this, so it’s perfectly safe. Or you can find a boy who’s willing to put his dick up there. That’s even better than dildos or hairbrushes,” he smiled and winked.

“I think I’ve already found a guy that’s willing to do that,” I smiled and looked expectantly at Glenn.

“Haha! I’m willing, that’s for sure. But I think I’m too big for you and I might hurt you. Maybe in a few years, Bud.”

“I was afraid you’d say that,” I said, feeling a bit disappointed.

We went quiet after that and just stared at the ocean and the crashing waves. I looked over and wondered about the weird line of trees and bushes at the end of the beach. It almost felt like someone planted it there to prevent people from falling off the island or something.

The line ended at the ocean on both sides, and it looked like a lost piece of rainforest decided it liked the beach better.

“What’s with these trees?” I asked.

“Dunno. They’re here for as long as I can remember,” Glenn said as he looked at the tree line.

“Have you ever gone through to see where they end?”

“No. I went around the island with a boat once, and there’s no way to get there from the water. There’s sort of a ring of pointy rocks in the ocean after the tree line. I think it’s just rocks and stones over there.”

“Can we go and check it out?” I asked excitedly, already looking forward to an adventure with Glenn.

“I don’t see why. Like I said, probably nothing but rocks. And Gloria will be here soon. Maybe later, okay?”

I felt a bit disappointed, but Glenn did have a point. I was looking forward to spending the afternoon with Gloria, and we could always check it out later.

“Ready for a few more pics until Gloria gets here?” Glenn asked, holding up his camera and radically changing the subject.

“Sure!” I said, “What do we need?”

“I need just a few more to tell the story. Not everything I shot so far is suited for Pyntar,” he winked.

After he shot a few more with me lying on my back, some with my knee in the air to hide my dick, he asked me to roll over and lay on my stomach. After a few more of these, I heard, “There you are!” and I looked up to see Gloria walk toward us.

“Hi Gloria,” I said and waved.

“Just in time, Hon. We’re done here,” Glenn said and kissed his wife on her cheek.

“I’ll see you two later. I’m off to see Lucas,” Glenn said as he grabbed his camera bag.

“Any idea when you’ll be back?” Gloria asked.

“Not really. But knowing Lucas, it’ll be late. Or early,” Glenn smiled.

“Have fun!” both Gloria and I said as Glenn started walking toward the apartment.

When he rounded the corner, he waved at us. I got up from my sitting position and looked excitedly at Gloria, not feeling any need to cover up.

“You know you’re allowed to be naked out here?” I said, pointing toward both ends of the beach.

“Haha. Yeah, I know. And it’s just the thing for you, honey. Isn’t it?”

“Yeah. I really like it a lot!”

“Ready for the real fun then?” Gloria asked and handed me my swimming trunks.

“What are we going to do?” I asked as I took it and started pulling them up.

It turned out that Gloria had an excellent idea of fun. She rented a speedboat for us. There even was a parasail option on it, which I had to try out, of course.

We spent almost the entire day at sea. Every time I got behind the wheel of the speedboat, I felt like the king of the world. The sheer power of the boat, combined with the wind in my hair and the splashes of water in my face, was priceless.

After returning the boat, we went to the harbor, where Gloria had made reservations in a small restaurant. After getting our drinks, I raised my glass, and Gloria did the same.

“To an amazing day,” I said as our glasses touched.

“To an amazing day,” Gloria said in return and smiled.

We checked the menu, and after the waiter took our order, Gloria looked thoughtfully at me.

“The time in Africa is almost over for your parents,” she said, clearly trying to see how I’d react.

But I didn’t mind talking about it. I could tell Glenn and Gloria everything. So I shrugged and said, “I know. And according to mom, they’re going to live in Seattle for a year so that I can settle down even more. So I’m glad they’re thinking about me for once.”

I wasn’t angry or anything. It was just something I felt deep inside, something I could vent to Gloria about. She kept looking and just nodded.

“I get it. But it’s the life your dad chose, and you’ll have to deal with it. Sometimes things don’t feel fair, and I guess this is one of these things.”

“I guess. And with you and Glenn, I can do the things I like to do without the constant mocking from my dad. He wants me to play baseball or football. He just doesn’t get my interest in photography,” I glumly said.

“I wouldn’t worry about that too much, Honey. You just keep doing your thing, and he’ll see it isn’t a fluke or anything. It’s a very… uhm… manly world he’s in, and photography doesn’t have a very masculine image.”

“I know. And I don’t hate him for it or anything. And we do fun stuff together too. But I just wish… you know…”

“I do. But look at the bright side. When you’re staying in Seattle, you can come and visit us as much as you want!” she said smiling. “You’re funny, kind, helpful, and SO much more. We’re delighted you stayed with us this past year…”

“Almost a year,” I interrupted her with a smile.

“You’re right. Almost a year. But the guest room isn’t the guest room anymore. It’s YOUR room now,” Gloria said and pointed at me.

“I uhm…” I stammered, flabbergasted by her heartwarming words.

“So, please. Will you do us a favor and keep coming over, lighting up our days?”

“Yes. Yes! I’d love to!”

“I’ll drink to that,” and Gloria held up her glass of coke once again.

The dinner we had was excellent. The Colombian kitchen isn’t that well known across the world, but I didn’t eat anything that wasn’t tasteful during my time there. After Gloria paid the bill, we walked toward the exit and waited for the cab. Once it pulled up, I opened the door for Gloria to let her go in.

“Wow! Quite the gentleman,” she smiled.

I quickly walked around the car and got in on the other side. During the ride, I felt a warm feeling inside my stomach because of the love Gloria expressed for me.

“I really love you guys! And I can’t thank you enough for taking me in!” and I hugged Gloria tightly on the cab’s back seat.

“I love you too, Honey. And don’t worry about it! We’re so glad to have you over. You’re basically doing us a favor.”

When we entered the apartment, Glenn wasn’t home yet. But I felt tired, so I went to the bathroom to do my business and brush my teeth. Then, I walked back into the living room to give Gloria a goodnight hug and kiss, which she eagerly accepted.

“What’s the plan for tomorrow?” I asked before I left the room.

“I’m off early tomorrow. But Glenn will be home. I’m going to visit the other side of the island with Thiago to see how the situation is over there at first hand. I’m curious, and I might be able to use that in one of my lessons. I think Glenn only has one appointment tomorrow, and it’s late in the afternoon.”

“Cool. Goodnight!”

“Night, Honey.”

* * *

A honking car outside the apartment woke me up. I looked at the alarm clock and learned it was a little past nine. I idly toyed with my sparse pubes and with my balls hanging down in my loose sack as I thought about the great day I had with Gloria. My morning wood stuck up from my groin, and the urge to go peeing grew by the minute.

After doing my business in the bathroom, I wasn’t sure what to do. I felt a bit horny, but it was also almost time for Gloria to get up and start making breakfast, so a quick wank wasn’t an option. That’s when I realized Gloria was gone already and that it was just Glenn and me.

I figured Glenn would probably be in for some fooling around, so I quietly walked over to their room. As I approached it, I saw the door was open, and the light was streaming in from the window.

Glenn was lying on his back, legs spread, and one arm above his head. He snored loudly, and his face was looking toward the window, away from the door. The thin sheet was crumbled around his feet, and his dick lay softly on his thigh.

As I looked at his groin, I noticed how massive his balls looked compared to mine. They weren’t very hairy, so I could study them nicely from where I was standing. I wondered if I should wake him. He probably had a short night, but he’d already said he didn’t want to sleep this vacation away. So, after thinking about it for a few moments, I tip-toed over to the bed and got on the mattress between his legs as quietly as I could.

Judging by his snoring and the fact that he didn’t move a muscle, I figured I was still good. So I leaned forward a bit, took his soft dick in my hand, and sucked it into my mouth.

This was the first time I had his dick in my mouth while it was soft. I played with it by using my tongue and cheeks for a bit, and it started to grow before long.

After toying with it a bit longer and wrapping my lips around it, it was as hard as I remembered. The snoring above me had died down, but I saw Glenn was still asleep when I looked up.

Feeling Glenn’s hard dick in my mouth got me pretty worked up, so I decided to start sucking him for real now. I used my right hand to wrap around his shaft while my tongue worked his dickhead. I was getting into it when I felt Glenn move.

“Huh? What?” he mumbled, and moments later, I felt his hand on my head.

I let his dick slip from my mouth, looked up at Glenn, and smiled. “Morning,” I whispered and started lapping his dick from bottom to top like a popsicle while keeping my eyes locked with his.

“Ooohhh… that’s some way to wake up…” Glenn groaned.

Moments later, he rubbed me over my cheek and said, “Come here,” and he gently pulled me up to his body.

I crawled up to lay down on his muscular chest with my legs on each side of his body and my boner pressing in his stomach. He kissed me on my mouth and hugged me tightly.

“Why did you do that?” he asked.

“I like doing that. And I like doing this stuff with you.”

“We’ll… we’ve got all morning, so no need to rush,” Glenn said smiling.

Lying there on top of Glenn with his muscular body pressed against mine and with every now and then a warm breeze over my body, I felt safe, horny, and completely at ease. But when I shifted my body down slightly, I felt Glenn’s hardon press against my ass.

I looked at Glenn the moment this happened and firmly pressed my butt against it. Glenn just smiled and let me do my thing for a moment.

“I think I want to try it now. I think I can handle it,” I whispered, feeling a bit nervous because of his size but also excited as hell to try it.

Glenn looked at me and sized me up. I could see him struggling with what he should do, but after a few moments, he said, “First, we’re gonna try if it’s even an option. Your anus might be too tight for it, and I don’t want to hurt you.”

“Really!? Thanks!” I said excitedly and looked him deep into his eyes, “And I know you won’t hurt me! So how do we do this?”

“Haha! How can I say no to such eagerness?” Glenn laughed, “I’ll grab the lube, and we’ll try with my fingers how tight you are and let you get used to the feeling of more than just one finger.”

Glenn gently pushed me aside, where I landed on the mattress and lay on my back. My hand started toying with my boner as Glenn went to the bathroom. When he came back, he had a jar in his hand, and his bouncing boner led the way as he walked toward the bed.

“Get on all fours, Bud. It’ll be easier that way.

I quickly got on my hands and knees and asked, “Is that lube?”

“Yeah. It’s coconut oil. It’s one hundred percent natural and slippery as hell. People over here use it for all sorts of things. Here. Check it out,” he said, holding the jar in front of me.

I sniffed at it, and it didn’t smell like much. Just plain coconut. I dipped one finger in it and examined its texture. Glenn was right. This stuff was very slippery and looked a bit like thick water on my fingers.

“Cool. And now you put it on your willie, or what?”

“Not yet. First, I’m gonna use my fingers to lube up your hole. But more importantly, to check if it isn’t too tight down there. You ready?” Glenn asked as he took the jar, his boner wiggling in the corner of my eyes.

“I guess…” I said, still eager to try but a bit anxious about it.

I felt Glenn’s finger rub over my hole a few moments later. I was surprised about how warm the oil felt on his finger. I expected a cold rush like when someone squirts sunscreen on your back. But the opposite was true.

After rubbing around for a short while, Glenn said, “I’m going to press now and try to slide in. Don’t try to clamp your hole shut. Just try to push like you’re taking a dump. It’ll be way easier that way.”

I simply nodded and did what Glenn asked. And the moment Glenn’s finger started sliding in, I felt my boner twitch and couldn’t hold back a moan.

“You’re doing great, Bud,” Glenn softly said. “This was way easier than I anticipated.”

He started sliding his finger in and out, and each time he hit a particular spot, my boner twitched. Finally, after a minute or so, he slid out, stuck his finger in the oil, and said, “I’m lubing you up extra good to make sure it doesn’t hurt that much.”

I simply nodded again because I was enjoying this too much and didn’t trust my voice at that moment.

“I’m going to try using two fingers now. I think you’re loose enough for that. Is that okay?”

“Uh-huh,” I mumbled, pressing my ass against his hand and feeling all-new incredible sensations flowing through my body.

When Glenn’s fingers left me to scoop up some more oil, I felt empty but couldn’t wait for him to enter me again and rub against that weird spot inside me.

“Okay, Bud. Take a deep breath, try to relax, and push back a little, okay?”

“Yeah… just… I’m…” I stammered, trying to find the right words.

Glenn must’ve sensed I was ready for it because he started pressing with two fingers now. As the pressure grew, I remembered Glenn’s words, took a deep breath, and pushed back by using my muscles around my asshole. Moments later, I felt both fingers slide in slowly and moaned.

“Does it hurt?” Glenn asked worriedly and immediately stopped moving his fingers.

“No. It doesn’t hurt. I just… feel full. It feels good,” I said, still trying to relax as much as possible.

“So I just keep going?”

“Oh yes, please!”

After a few minutes, Glenn’s fingers were probing around and sliding in and out of my ass easily. Every time he touched my sensitive spot, I moaned loudly. My dick was rock hard, and I felt horny as hell by now.

“I didn’t expect it, Bud, but I think you’re ready,” Glenn whispered in my ear, his finger still sliding in and out.

I looked up, and a big smile spread across my face when I saw the look in Glenn’s eyes. Of course, I wasn’t very experienced yet, but I had seen this look before, and it was one of pure lust.

“I think it’s better if you lie down on your back. Just spread your legs, lift your knees, and place this pillow under your lower back,” he said and grabbed the oil.

I did just that and looked at Glenn while he lubed up his big, hard dick. As I looked at it and realized how much thicker his dick was, I suddenly felt a wave of nervousness wash over me. Glenn must’ve noticed because he asked, “Nervous?”

I just nodded and whispered, “Yeah. A bit.”

“Don’t worry. We’ll stop the second you want! Just say it, and we’ll find another cool thing to do,” Glenn said soothingly.

I was still horny as hell, so despite the anxiety, I nodded and said, “I want to do this, so just fuck me already.”

Both Glenn and I looked surprised as these words came out of my mouth, and I started giggling nervously while Glenn just smiled broadly.

“Alright, Bud. I’ll fuck you already!” He smiled and grabbed his hard dick in his hand.

Moments later, I felt the tip of his dick brushing against my slippery butt hole. He pressed firmly against it and softly said, “Remember. Deep breaths and press as if you’re going to the toilet.”

I nodded once more and felt my heart throbbing in my throat. I inhaled deeply, and the moment Glenn’s dick started sliding in, I exhaled and loosened my sphincter. I felt a popping sensation and a mild gust of pain. But the pain went away immediately, and I realized Glenn had entered me. The feeling was quite overwhelming, and I needed a moment to get used to being so full.

I looked at his face and noticed his worried expression. He was constantly looking at me to see if I was okay.

“I feel it,” I moaned softly.

“You okay?”

“Yes. Just give me one second to adjust.”

“Sure,” Glenn said and held his body perfectly still.

After a few seconds, I felt Glenn’s fingers wrap around my stiff dick, and he started playing with it. He wasn’t jacking me, just massaging it and making me feel good. This worked quite well, and after a few more moments, I said, “Can you go deeper?”

Now it was Glenn’s turn to nod, and with a soft push of his hips, I felt him entering me. It was a little uncomfortable, but the feeling of something entering me, the naughtiness of it, combined with his massaging hand, was way more powerful, and I started panting heavily.

When his dick rubbed against that particular spot inside me, I moaned loudly, and my dick started twitching furiously.

“Ooohhh. Yessss…”

Glenn just kept going. He slid in, retracted a bit, slid in further, and repeated this a few times. I was in heaven. The expected pain wasn’t there. Only the fantastic feeling of his hard dick inside of me and rubbing against something I didn’t know I had.

The moment I felt his pubes tickle against my hairless balls, I knew I would want this a lot more. Since his dick rubbed that spot the first time, I was on the verge of an orgasm.

“Oh, wow,” Glenn moaned, “you’re doing great! I’m all the way in.”

“Ooohhh. I know. Ahhh… I… hmmm…” was all that came out.

When Glenn slowly moved out, I felt like my orgasm hit me. But it lingered a bit, and when Glenn pushed back in, the same thing happened. With each fucking motion from Glenn, I felt like I almost came.

At that moment, I couldn’t speak anymore. Only low grunts escaped my throat, and all my attention was between my legs. Glenn was still massaging my dick, but he started jerking me in earnest after we fucked for a while.

The fucking wasn’t loud or obscene. Just slow, steady strokes from Glenn. But after he fucked me for a few minutes more, I noticed a change on his face. I knew by now that this meant he would be coming soon. At that moment, his inbound thrusts became more fierce, and when his groin slapped against my butt, this felt even better for me.

“AH! YES! AH! YES! AH! YES!!” I kept grunting.

“UH! UH! UH! UHH!” Glenn groaned.

The sound of loud slaps filled the room, and the feeling inside me intensified even more. I still don’t know if it was Glenn’s fat dick filling me up, the rubbing against ‘that’ spot, or the idea of being submissive to someone. But I don’t care now, and I certainly didn’t care back then.

“Ohhh… I’m cumming!” Glenn moaned and kept slamming into me.

The familiar tingle I usually felt when I came didn’t come this time. Instead, it was more like a whirlpool of soft cotton balls floating through my head and body. But when Glenn slapped at me with a final push, and his dick started kicking inside me, his hot cum coating my insides, all muscles between my belly button and knees began to contract.

Glenn and I came at the same time, and I felt so connected to him at that moment that I still remember that feeling vividly until today. My orgasm was very different from my usual orgasms. It usually focused on my dick, this time, it felt like it came from the inside behind my pubes. It’s hard to explain, and I still can’t put it into words. I did notice something splashing on my belly in the back of my head but was too engrossed with this different orgasm to notice or care.

Glenn stayed inside me for a few more moments but eventually, he had to pull out and lay down on his back beside me on the bed.

As we lay there side by side, regaining our breaths and letting the air cool us, I felt a bit of Glenn’s cum oozing out of my hole. I knew I couldn’t help it, and instead of feeling embarrassed by it, I felt a sense of pride for being able to give him this much pleasure and for being able to take his fat dick up my ass.

After a while, I felt something cold on my belly and looked down to see what it was. There, around my belly button, a long stripe of watery cum laid glistening in the morning light. I never came this much, and I wondered if this was even my cum.

Glenn saw me looking and said, “You came a lot, Bud! You’re becoming a man!”

He extended his fingers, scooped up a glob, and put it in his mouth. I did the same, and after two or three times, my belly was clean.

“How did I do?” I finally asked, curious how Glenn experienced it.

“Honestly?” he asked and looked at me.

I nodded shyly, a little bit afraid of what he’d say.

“I honestly didn’t think you could handle it and that you’d be too tight down there. But the opposite is true! You were amazing! It’s been a long time since I’ve had sex that was this good!”

I felt a blanket of pride covering me and realized we’d probably be doing this a lot more.

“And you?” Glenn asked, smiling.

“It was awesome! The moment your dickhead was in, I felt a bit of pain. But that was gone before I knew it. Your dick kept rubbing against a special spot inside me, and each time it did, it felt a bit better.”

“That’s your prostate. Most men like it a lot when it’s stimulated,” he said. And after a few seconds, “So do I.”

I felt a bit more oozing out and moved my hand down to assess the damage. Glenn noticed and said, “You’d better go to the bathroom and let it all out. After that, we’ll take a shower and clean ourselves up properly.”

And that’s precisely what we did. After showering, we ate breakfast together. And after breakfast, Glenn sucked me off at the kitchen table. Just like that. I wanted to return the favor, but he just said he wasn’t eighteen anymore and explained it took him a while to get going again.

It wasn’t even noon yet when we arrived at the beach. Glenn wasn’t much of a beach guy, but after a bit of whining from me, he decided we could go. Of course, we took the usual stuff like towels, sunscreen, and frisbee with us, but I insisted on leaving our trunks in the apartment. It took some convincing, but eventually, Glenn agreed.

Lounging naked on the beach with Glenn was absolutely amazing. We chatted a bit, swam in the ocean, threw the frisbee around, and generally had a good time. Being naked together in a public place added a whole new level to it for me, and it was simply fantastic.

I felt a bit odd down there for the rest of the day, but nothing substantial. Glenn assured me this would wear off. I didn’t care about it. I got fucked for the first time, and I loved it!

Copyright 2022 – Jason Crow
All rights reserved

Postica mea ridiculam sentit, sed eam amavi

Here’s the download link to this chapter’s audio file: Link

But I recommend downloading the complete audio file (.m4a, .m4b or .MP3) for the best experience. There’s also an eBook in both the ePub and PDF format available for download here.
Click here to go to the Audio book/eBook page